P-334U - Routeur ZYXEL - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free P-334U ZYXEL in PDF.

View the manual :

Table of contents Click a title to go to the page

Manual assistant

Waiting for your message

Product information

Brand : ZYXEL

Model : P-334U

Category : Routeur

Download the PDF manual Print

Download the instructions for your Routeur in PDF format for free! Find your manual P-334U - ZYXEL and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. P-334U by ZYXEL.

USER MANUAL P-334U ZYXEL

The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

+ This device may not cause harmful interference.

+ This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

+ _Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. + Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

+ This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

+ For operation within 5.15 - 5.25GHZ frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environment.

+ IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11.

+ To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.

EE ! RÉ ÉDIRENRÉENEERNSRENRE BHCIR RARE RE RIRE à JEAGSFO A7] HSEUR

Æ 5250MHz-53S0MHz SR PIRE RARE à FREINER -

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Viewing Certifications

1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.

3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.

+ Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

+ Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.

+ Do NOT store things on the device.

+ Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

+ Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.

+ Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.

+ Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

+ Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.

+ Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.

+ Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.

+ _ Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).

+ Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.

+ Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.

+ _Ifthe power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.

+ Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.

+ Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

+ Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.

+ Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).

+ _If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.

This product is recyclable. Dispose of it properly.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.

To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.

ZyXEL Limited Warranty 7

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.

Product model and serial number.

Warranty Information.

Date that you received your device.

Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve

A. “#" is the (prefix) number you enter to make an international telephone call.

ZyXEL Limited Warranty...

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device

Table of Contents 11

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard...

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN.

12 Table of Contents

Table of Contents 13

14 Table of Contents

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN

13.1 IPSec VPN Overview 13.1.1 IKE SA (IKE Phase 1) Overview . 13.1.1.1 IP Addresses of the 2yXEL L Device and Remote IPSec Router 13.1.21KE SA Setup 13.1.2.1 IKE SA Proposal 13. 2 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Exchange 13.1.2.3 Authentication eee 13.1.2.4 Negotiation Mode 13.1.2.5 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal . 13.1.3 IPSec SA (IKE Phase 2) Overview 13.1.3.1 Local Network and Remote Network . 13.1.3.2 IPSec Protocol 13.1.3.3 Encapsulation 13.1.3.4 IPSec SA Proposal and Perfect Forward Secrecy 13.1.4 Additional IPSec VPN Topics 13.1.4.1 SA Life Time . : 13.1.4.2 Encryption and Authentication Algorithmes | . 13.2 Remote DNS Server 13.3 VPN Summary 13.4 VPN Rule Setup (IKE) . 13.5 Advanced VPN Rule Setup (IKE) 13.6 IPSec SA Using Manual Keys 13.6.1 IPSec SA Proposal Using Manual Keys . 13.6.2 Authentication and the Security Parameter Index (SP) 13.7 VPN Rule Setup (Manual) 13.8 VPN SA Monitor 13.9 VPN Global Setting 13.10 Telecommuter VPN/IPSec Examples … 13.10.1 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example . 13.10.2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example 13.11 VPN and Remote Management

Chapter 14 Static Route Screens

14.1 Static Route Overview 14.2 IP Static Route Screen 14.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management.

15.1 Bandwidth Management Overview

Table of Contents 15

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

15.2 Application-based Bandwidth Management 15.3 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management 15.4 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management 15.5 Bandwidth Management Priorities 15.6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services . 15.6.1 Services and Port Numbers 15.7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities 15.8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration 15.9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration . 15.9.1 Rule Configuration with the Pre-defined Service 15.9.2 Rule Configuration with the User-defined Service 15.10 Bandwidth Management Monitor

Chapter 16 Remote Management Screens

16.1 Remote Management Overview …… 16.1.1 Remote Management Limitations . 16.1.2 Remote Management and NAT . 16.1.3 System Timeout .

21.1 View Log 21.2 Log Settings

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting

24.1 Problems Starting Up the ZyXEL Device 24.2 Problems with the LAN . 24.3 Problems with the WAN 24.4 Problems Accessing the ZyXEL Device .

Table of Contents 17

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 97 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example . Figure 98 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example . Figure 99 VPN for Remote Management Example Figure 100 Example of Static Routing Topology Figure 101 IP Static Route … Figure 102 Static Route Setup Figure 103 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example Figure 104 Bandwidth Management: General … 179 Figure 105 Bandwidth Management: Advanced 180 Figure 106 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Pre-defined Service 182 Figure 107 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service . 183

Congratulations on your purchase of the P-334U or P-335U 802.11a/g Wireless Router. This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your P-334U or P-335U for its various applications.

About This User's Guide

This User’s Guide is designed to guide you through the configuration of your ZyXEL Device using the web configurator.

Note: Use the web configurator or command interpreter interface to configure your ZyXEL Device. Not all features can be configured through all interfaces.

Related Documentation

+ Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents. Quick Start Guide

The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. They contain connection information and instructions on getting started.

+ Web Configurator Online Help

Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information.

+ ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site

Please refer to www.zyxel.com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation.

Help us help you! E-mail all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters@zyxel.com.tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan. Thank you!

Syntax Conventions + “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters. “Select” or “Choose” means for you to use one predefined choice.

+ Mouse action sequences are denoted using a right angle bracket (> ). For example, “In Windows, click Start > Settings > Control Panel” means first click the Start button, then point your mouse pointer to Settings and then click Control Panel.

+ “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

+ The P-334U or P-33SU series may be referred to as the “ZyXEL Device” in this User’s

Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device

This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the ZyXEL Device.

1.1 ZyXEL Device Overview

The P-334U or P-33SU is the ideal secure wireless firewall router for all data passing between the Internet and LAN'Ss.

You can configure firewall and/or content filtering for secure Internet access. You can also use media bandwidth management to efficiently manage traffic on your network. On the P-335U, you can also set up a VPN tunnel that gives you a secure connection to another computer or network without the need (and expense) for leased lines between sites.

The P-334U or P-335U supports the IEEE 802.11a, b and g standards, so that either IEEE

802.11b/g or IEEE 802.11a compatible clients can wirelessly accesss the P-334U or P-335U or the wired network behind it.

The P-335U provides a USB port to connect to a USB v1.1 compliant printer and can act as a print server. The computers connected to the P-335U can share a priner without a dedicated or standalone print server.

Note: Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Device’s specific model.

See Appendix A on page 245 for a complete list of features.

1.2 Applications for the ZyXEL Device

Here are some examples of what you can do with your ZyXEL Device.

See the Quick Start Guide for instructions on hardware connections.

1.2.1 Secure Broadband Internet Access via Cable or DSL Modem

For Internet access, connect the WAN Ethernet port to your existing Internet access gateway (company network, or your cable or DSL modem for example). Connect computers or servers to the LAN ports for shared Internet access.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device 31

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

The ZyXEL Device guarantees not only high speed Internet access, but secure internal network protection and traffic management as well.

Figure 1 Secure Internet Access via Cable or DSL Modem

WAN You can also configure firewall and content filtering on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example.

Use content filtering to block access to web sites containing keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled and include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering. For example, you could block access to certain web sites for the kids.

Use bandwidth management to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure

that voice over Internet calls get enough bandwidth in your network, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the boss’s excessive file downloading.

1.2.2 Wireless LAN Application

Add a wireless LAN to your existing network without expensive network cables. Wireless clients can move freely anywhere in the coverage area and use resources on the wired network.

Figure 2 WLAN Application Example

32 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

1.2.3 Print Server and Router Combined Application (P-335U Only)

The P-335U's built-in print server allows your network’s computers to share a printer. Simply connect a USB printer to the USB port on the ZyXEL Device. The following figure shows how you can setup your printer to operate on a LAN using the P-335U as a router and print server.

Figure 3 Print Server Application

1.2.4 VPN Application (P-335U Only)

The P-335U VPN is an ideal cost-effective way to connect branch offices, business partners and telecommuters over the Internet without the need (and expense) for leased lines between sites.

Figure 4 VPN Application

1.3 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device

Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device. + Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a (supported) web browser. + FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore (Chapter 16 on page 185) + SPTGEN. SPTGEN is a text configuration file that allows you to configure the device by

uploading an SPTGEN file. This is especially convenient if you need to configure many devices of the same type.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device 33

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

1.4 Good Habits for Managing Your ZyXEL Device

Here are some things you should do regularly.

+ Change the password. Use a password that's not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.

+ _ Write down the password and put it in a safe place.

+ Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL Device. You could simply restore your last configuration.

1.4.1 Front Panel LEDs

34 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 1 Front Panel LEDs

COLOR |STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and functioning properly.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is performing testing.

Red On Power to the ZyXEL Device is too low.

None Off The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.

LAN 1-4 Green On The ZyXEL Device has a successful 10Mb Ethernet connection.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data.

Amber On The ZyXEL Device has a successful 100Mb Ethernet connection.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data.

None Off The LAN is not connected.

WAN Green On The ZyXEL Device has a successful 10Mb WAN connection.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data.

Amber On The ZyXEL Device has a successful 100Mb Ethernet connection.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data.

None Off The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed.

AIG Green On The ZyXEL Device is in IEEE 802.11b or g wireless LAN mode, but is not sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data through the IEEE 802.11b or g wireless LAN.

Amber On The ZyXEL Device is in IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN mode, but is not sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data through the IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN.

None Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed.

OTIST Green Blinking OTIST is in progress

On OTIST is activated and the wireless security settings are given to a wireless client. The LED remains on unless the WLAN settings are changed.

None Off OTIST is not activated or WLAN settings are manually configured after OTIST is successful.

USB Off The print server connection is not ready, or has failed.

(P-335U only) Green on The print server has a successful connection.

Blinking The print server is sending/receiving data.

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

36 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your ZyXEL Device

This chapter describes how to access the ZyXEL Device web configurator and provides an overview of its screens.

2.1 Web Configurator Overview

The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy ZyXEL Device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

+_Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.

+_JavaScripts (enabled by default). +_ Java permissions (enabled by default).

Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer.

2.2 Accessing the Web Configurator

1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer/computer network to connect to the ZyXEL Device (refer to the Quick Start Guide).

2 Launch your web browser. 3 Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL.

4 Type "1234" (default) as the password and click Login. In some versions, the default password appears automatically - if this is the case, click Login.

5 You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Type a new password (and retype it to confirm) and click Apply or click Ignore.

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 37

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 7 Change Password Screen

Please enter a new password

our route is current using the defaut passmord To protect your naork fr your password at this time,

L et remember yet difficult for 'thers to guess.We suggest you combine text with numbers to make it more “difficult to

Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply log back into the ZyXEL Device if this happens to you.

2.3 Resetting the ZyXEL Device

If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the ZyXEL Device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.

2.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button

1 Make sure the PWR LED is on (not blinking).

2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the PWR LED begins to blink and then release it. When the PWR LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the ZyXEL Device restarts.

2.4 Navigating the Web Configurator

We use the P-334U web screens in this guide as an example. Screens vary slightly for different ZyXEL Device models.

The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen.

38 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

up 200M/Full Packet Statistics{Details, VPN Manitar (Details up 200M/Full WILAN Station Status (Details

The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen.

Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key

ICON DESCRIPTION Lançuece : ET Select a language from the drop-down list box to have the web configurator display in that language. 7 Click this icon to open a web help page relevant to the screen you are currently E configuring.

Click this icon to open the setup wizard. The ZyXEL Device has a connection wizard and a bandwidth management wizard.

Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information.

(sn Click this icon at any time to exit the web configurator.

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 39

Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics.

Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics.

The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.

Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information

This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System > General screen. lt is for identification purposes.

This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date created. ZyNOS is ZyXEL's proprietary Network Operating System design.

- MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device. - IP Address This shows the WAN ports IP address.

- IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port's subnet mask.

- DHCP This shows the WAN ports DHCP role - Client or None.

- MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.

- IP Address This shows the LAN port's IP address.

- IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port's subnet mask.

- DHCP This shows the LAN port's DHCP role - Server, Relay or None.

- MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.

- Name(SSID) LR shows a descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in the wireless

- Channel This shows the channel number which the ZyXEL Device uses over the wireless LAN.

This shows the level of wireless security the ZyXEL Device is using.

This shows the wireless standard.

This is the total time the ZyXEL Device has been on.

This field displays your ZyXEL Device's present date and time along with the difference from the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) zone. The difference from GMT is based on the time zone. lt is also adjusted for Daylight Saving Time if you set the ZyXEL Device to use it.

This number shows how many kilobytes of the heap memory the ZyXEL Device is using. Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall.

The bar displays what percent of the ZyXEL Device's heap memory is in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached.

This number shows the ZyXEL Device's total heap memory (in kilobytes).

The bar displays what percent of the ZyXEL Device's heap memory is in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached.

This shows whether the firewall is active or not.

- Bandwidth Management

This shows whether the bandwidth management is active or not.

- UPnP This shows whether UPnP is active or not.

- Configuration Mode

This shows whether the advanced screens of each feature are turned on (Advanced) or not (Basic).

This displays the ZyXEL Device port types. The port types are: WAN, LAN and WLAN.

For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected).

For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled.

For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected.

For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPOE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected.

For the WLAN, it displays the connection type (54M or 11M) when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.

Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device's bandwidth usage and allotments.

DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information. Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics. VPN Monitor Use this screen to view the active VPN connections.

Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the ZyXEL Device.

2.4.1 Navigation Panel

After you enter the password, use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure ZyXEL Device features.

LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the ZyXEL Device's general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables. Network Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN. OTIST This screen allows you to assign wireless clients the ZyXEL Device's wireless security settings. MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device. Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings. WAN Internet This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address Connection assignment and the WAN MAC address. Advanced Use this screen to configure DNS servers and other advanced properties. LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask. IP Alias Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets. Advanced Use this screen to enable other advanced properties. DHCP Server | General Use this screen to enable the ZyXEL Device's DHCP server. Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server. Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT. Application Use this screen to configure servers behind the ZyXEL Device. Advanced Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device's port triggering settings. DDNS General Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS. Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/ add a firewall rule. Content Filter Filter Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keywords in the URL. Schedule Use this screen to set the days and times for the ZyXEL Device to perform content filtering. VPN Summary Use this screen to view the rule summary (P-336U only) | Rule Setup Use this screen to configure VPN connections. SA Monitor Use this screen to display active VPN connections. Global Setting Use this screen to allow NetBIOS traffic through VPN tunnels. Management Static Route IP Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes.

LINK TAB FUNCTION Bandwidth General Use this screen to enable bandwidth management. MGMT Advanced Use this screen to set the upstrem bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule. Monitor Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Devices bandwidth usage and allotments. Remote MGMT | WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the ZyXEL Device. Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the ZyXEL Device. FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the ZyXEL Device. DNS Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the ZyXEL Device. Print Server Print Server Use this screen to view the printer model name and to monitor the printer {P-335U only) status. Maintenance System General This screen contains administrative. Time Setting Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device's time and date. Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected. Log Settings Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device's log settings. Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device. Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your ZyXEL Device. Restart This screen allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off. Config Mode General This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or features.

2.4.2 Summary: Bandwidth Management Monitor

Select the BW MGMT Monitor (Details...) hyperlink in Status screen. View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules. This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule. The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

BW MGMT Monitor VolP (SIP)

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here

relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the ZyXEL Device’s DHCP server.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 5 Summary: DHCP Table

# This is the index number of the host computer.

IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Host Name This field displays the computer host name.

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Table 5 Summary: DHCP Table (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address | This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field.

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.

Refresh Click Refresh to renew the screen.

2.4.4 Summary: Packet Statistics

Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics. Also provided are "system up time" and "poil interval(s)". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Figure 12 Summary: Packet Statistics

LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the WAN, LAN or WLAN port. Status For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when

the line is disconnected.

For the WLAN, it displays the connection type (54M or 11M) when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled.

TxPkts This is the number of transmitted packets on this port.

RxPkts This is the number of received packets on this port.

Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port.

Tx B/s This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port.

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 45

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 12 Summary: Packet Statistics

LABEL DESCRIPTION Rx B/s This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port. Up Time This is the total amount of time the line has been up.

System Up Time This is the total time the ZyXEL Device has been on.

Poll Interval(s) Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.

Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field.

Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics, click Stop.

Click VPN Monitor (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. This screen displays read-only information about the active VPN connections. À Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 6 Summary: VPN Monitor

LABEL DESCRIPTION # This is the security association index number. Name This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.

Encapsulation This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode.

IPSec Algorithm | This field displays the security protocols used for an SA.

Both AH and ESP increase ZyXEL Device processing requirements and communications latency (delay).

Refresh Click Refresh to redisplay the current screen.

2.4.6 Summary: Wireless Station Status

Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the ZyXEL Device in the Association List screen.

46 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Figure 14 Summary: Wireless Association List

Le [ac aaires [0 sssscatentme | @s |

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 7 Summary: Wireless Association List

LABEL DESCRIPTION # This is the index number of an associated wireless station. MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station.

This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the ZyXEL Device.

Click Refresh to redisplay the current screen.

This chapter provides information on the Wizard setup screens in the web configurator.

The web configurator’s Wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP (Internet Service Provider) checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you don’t have that information.

1 After you access the ZyXEL Device Web configurator, click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink.

You can click the Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure advanced features.

Figure 15 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode

Please select Wizard or Advanced mode

2 Choose your language from the drop-down list box.

3 Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 49

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 16 Select a Language Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup

Figure 17 Welcome to the Connection Wizard

4 Read the on-screen information and click Next.

Welcome to the ZyXEL Connection Wizard

3.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information

System Information contains administrative and system-related information.

System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name".

+_In Windows 95/98 click Start, Settings, Control Panel, Network. Click the Identification tab, note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name.

+_In Windows 2000, click Start, Settings and Control Panel and then double-click System. Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button. Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name.

+ In Windows XP, click Start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the ZyXEL Device System Name.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned from the ZyXEL Device via DHCP.

Click Next to configure the ZyXEL Device for Internet access.

Figure 18 Wizard Step 1: System Information

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 8 Wizard Step 1: System Information

LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name

System Name is a unique name to identify the ZyXEL Device in an Ethernet network. Enter a descriptive name. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long.

Spaces are not allowed, but dashes "-" and underscores "_" are accepted.

Type the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name.

Back Click Back to display the previous screen. Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 51

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 19 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN STEP*RESTEP-2-#STEP-SSTEP-4

iultiple will be able to

Security Extend(WPA-PSK with customized key) 2]

Channel Selection Auto

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table9 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Name(SSID) | Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.

If you change this field on the ZyXEL Device, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network.

Security Select a Security level from the drop-down list box.

Choose Auto to use OTIST to generate a pre-shared key and only if your wireless clients support OTIST. If you choose this option, skip directly to section 3.3.3.

Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. If you choose this option, skip directly to section 3.3.3.

Choose Basic security if you want to configure WEP Encryption parameters. |f you choose this option, go directly to section 3.3.1.

Choose Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) security to configure a Pre-Shared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK respectively. If you choose this option, skip directly to section 3.3.2.

Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a Selection channel.

This field displays Auto which means the ZyXEL Device automatically scans for and selects a channel which is not used by a nearby device.

Back Click Back to display the previous screen. Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

Note: The wireless stations and ZyXEL Device must use the same SSID, channel ID and WEP encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) or WPA2-PSK (if WPA2-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

STEPLE-STEP 2% STEP-3#STEP-4

64-bit WEP: Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for each Key(1-4). 128-bit WEP: Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters (" for each Key(1-4). -bit WEP: Enter 29 ASCII characters or 58 hexadecimal characters (” for each key (1-4). {Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission.)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Basic(WEP) Security

LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Type a Passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and click Generate. The ZyXEL Device automatically generates a WEP key. WEP Select 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP or 256-bit WEP to allow data encryption. Encryption

ASCII | Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as the WEP keys. HEX | Select this option to enter hexadecimal characters as the WEP keys. The preceding “Ox" is entered automatically.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.

If you chose 128: WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters (" 'A-F").

If you chose 256-bit WEP, then enter 29 ASCII characters or 58 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").

You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1.

Back Click Back to display the previous screen. Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.3.2 Extend(WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security

Choose Extend(WPA-PSK) or Extend(WPA2-PSK) security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key.

Figure 21 Wizard Step 2: Extend(WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security

STEPH STEP-24-STEP-4-STEP4

fs WIRELESS LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Extend(WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security

LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre-Shared Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure

Key wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this.

Back Click Back to display the previous screen.

Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen.

Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

3.3.3 OTIST The following screen allows you to enable ZyXEL Device One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology (OTIST). One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology (OTIST) allows your ZyXEL Device to assign wireless clients the ZyXEL Device’s SSID and static WEP or WPA- PSK encryption settings. The wireless client must also support OTIST and have OTIST enabled. See Section 4.4 on page 77 for more information.

Figure 22 Wizard Step 2: OTIST STEP-4+-STEP-2STEP-3% STEP 4

fs WIRELESS LAN Fou previously had "No Security" security enabled on your wireless LAN,

[ou have chosen to change the wireless LAN security to "WPA-PSK with defaulted key (recommend)".To use the "WPA-PSK with defaulted key Krecommend)" security option you must turn on ZyKEL's One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology (OTIST).

OTIST will automatically configure the SSID and security settings on both your router and your wireless clients, In order for this to work, you must be using IZyXEL ZYyAIR client adaptors that support OTIST.

[The OTIST configuration process may take up to 3 minutes.

Please type in à unique setup key. This key acts like à password to ensure

only those wireless LAN devices you authorize are configured by OTIST.You Will need to remember this key to setup new devices via OTIST.

Do you want to enable OTIST ? 9 Yes

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 12 Wizard Step 2: OTIST LABEL DESCRIPTION Do you want to Select the Yes radio button and click Next to proceed with the setup wizard and enable OTIST? enable OTIST only when you click Finish in the final wizard screen. Click No and then Next to proceed to the following screen. Setup Key The default OTIST Setup Key is “01234567”. This key can be changed in the

web configurator. Be sure to use the same OTIST Setup Key on the ZyXEL Device and wireless clients.

Back Click Back to display the previous screen. Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen. Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

Refer to the chapter on wireless LAN for more information.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 55

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

3.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration

The ZyXEL Device offers three Internet connection types. They are Ethernet, PPP over Ethernet or PPTP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. Ifthe wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type.

This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select.

Figure 23 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters.

STEP“ESTEP-2-#STEP:3#STEP-4

fm internet Configuration

Enter your Internet Service Provider's (IS Connection Type Ethernet

IPPP over Ethernet jPPTP

The following table describes the labels in this screen,

Table 13 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters

CONNECTION TYPE | DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.

PPPOE Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. If your ISP gave you a an |P address and/or subnet mask, then select PPTP.

PPTP Select the PPTP option for a dial-up connection.

3.4.1 Ethernet Connection

Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

3.4.2 PPPOE Connection

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPOE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPOE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks.

For the service provider, PPPOE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS).

One of the benefits of PPPOE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users.

Operationally, PPPOE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber’s site.

By implementing PPPOE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPOE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access.

Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPOE.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 57

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 25 Wizard Step 3: PPPOE Connection

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 14 Wizard Step 3: PPPOE Connection

LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameter for Internet Access

Connection Type | Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection.

Service Name Type the name of your service provider.

User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.

Password Type the password associated with the user name above. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to continue.

Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.3 PPTP Connection

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/ IP-based networks.

PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet.

Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP.

Note: The ZyXEL Device supports one PPTP server connection at any given time.

58 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

fm Internet Configuration

Enter your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) connection

Connection Type User Name

# Get automatically from 1SP (Default) © Use fixed IP address

The following table describes the fields in this screen

Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection

LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access

Connection Type Select PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection.

User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.

Password Type the password associated with the User Name above.

Get automatically | Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.

from ISP Use fixed IP Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the ZyXEL Device a fixed, address unique IP address.

My IP Address | Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.

My IP Subnet | Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).

Mask Server IP Address | Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Connection ID/ Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id" Name and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP.

This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP.

Back Click Back to return to the previous screen. Next Click Next to continue. Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 59

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

3.4.4 Your IP Address

The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the ZyXEL Device an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP.

STEP#STEP 2 STEP-3%STEP4

fm internet Configuration

® Used fixed IP address provided by your ISP The following table describes the labels in this screen

Table 16 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address

LABEL DESCRIPTION Get automatically from Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is

your ISP the default selection. If you choose this option, skip directly to section 3.4.9.

Use fixed IP address Select this option if you were given IP address and/or DNS server settings

provided by your ISP by the ISP. The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router.

Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to continue.

Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment

Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for instance, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks.

Table 17 Private IP Address Ranges

10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.

Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.

3.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask

Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.

Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.

Ifthe ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (ANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.

Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.

The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

3.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment

Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.

The ZyXEL Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 61

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and/or WAN > Internet Connection screen.

2 Ifthe ISP did not give you DNS server information, leave the DNS Server fields set to 0.0.0.0 in the Wizard screen and/or set to From ISP in the WAN > Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses.

3.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment

The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses.

Figure 28 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses

STEP4+-STEP 2 STEP-3+ STEP-4

fm internet Configuration

The following table describes the labels in this screen

Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses

LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Assignment

My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field. The WAN IP address should be in the same subnet as your DSL/Cable modem or router.

My WAN IP Subnet Mask | Enter the IP subnet mask in this field.

Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field.

System DNS Server Address Assignment (if applicable)

DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The ZyXEL Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server.

62 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses

LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Enter the DNS server's IP address in the fields provided.

Second DNS Server If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP addresses Third DNS Server when configuring DDNS and the time server.

Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to continue.

Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.9 WAN MAC Address

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.

Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses

Choose an IP address 192.168.1.2-192.168.1.32; 192.168.1.65-192.168.1.254. Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway (or default route) 192.168.1.1(ZyXEL Device LAN IP)

This screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the ZyXEL Device’s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the "rom" file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different "rom" file. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication.

STEP STEP-2 STEP /9%STEPr4

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 20 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address

LABEL DESCRIPTION Factory Default Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address.

Clone the Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose

computer's MAC MAC you are cloning. lt is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer

address on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication.

Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.

Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to continue.

Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.5 Connection Wizard: STEP 4: Bandwidth management

Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the ZyXEL Device’s WAN, LAN or WLAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth according to the traffic type. This helps keep one service from using all of the available bandwidth and shutting out other users.

Figure 30 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management

The following fields describe the label in this screen.

Table 21 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable BM for all traffic | Select the check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply bandwidth automatically management to traffic going out through the ZyXEL Device's WAN, LAN or

WLAN port. Bandwidth is allocated according to the traffic type automatically. Real-time packets, such as VolP traffic always get higher priority.

Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.

64 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Table 21 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Next Click Next to continue. Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.6 Connection Wizard Complete

Click Apply to save your configuration.

Figure 31 Connection Wizard Save

fm Internet Configuration Plea the “Apply" Button to Complete the

Note: If you are currently using a Wireless PC card to access this router AND you made changes to the SSID, then you will need to make the same changes to your Wireless PC card AFTER you click the Finish Button.

Once the changes have been made to the Wireless PC card, you will be able to connect back to the router and continue the configuration process.

L<Bact JAN pot FN a |

Follow the on-screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup.

Figure 32 Connection Wizard Complete

d'in the wizard are correct

Well done! You have successfully set up your ZyXEL Device to operate on your network and access the Internet.

Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 65

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

66 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Wireless LAN This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your ZyXEL Device. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks.

4.1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.

Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network

The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other

devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your ZyXEL Device is the AP.

Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.

+ Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. +_Iftwo wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels.

Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

+ Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.

Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.

4.2 Wireless Security Overview

The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network.

4.2.1 SSID Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.

This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.

4.2.2 MAC Address Filter

Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.! A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters?; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate User’s Guide or other documentation.

You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings.

This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.

4.2.3 User Authentication

You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.

1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.

2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,9, À,B,C, D,E, andF.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user.

+ Inthe AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database. + In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes.

If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.

Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network.

Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section.

Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message.

The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See Section 4.2.3 on page 68 for information about this.)

Table 22 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication

RADIUS Server Weakest No Security Static WEP î WPA-PSK WPA Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2

For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA- PSK, or WPA2-PSK.

Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN 69

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Note: lt is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly.

Itis not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database.

When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the ZyXEL Device.

Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key.

4.2.5 One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology (OTIST)

With ZyXEL's OTIST, you set up the SSID and WPA-PSK on the ZyXEL Device. Then, the ZyXEL Device transfers them to the devices in the wireless networks. As a result, you do not have to set up the SSID and encryption on every device in the wireless network.

The devices in the wireless network have to support OTIST, and they have to be in range of the ZyXEL Device when you activate it. See Section 4.4 on page 77 for more details.

4.3 General Wireless LAN Screen

Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device's SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Devices new settings.

Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Figure 34 Wireless General

The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.

Table 23 Wireless General

LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.

Wireless LAN Name(SSID) (Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.

Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.

Channel Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.

Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on whether you are using A or B/G frequency band and the country you are in. This field is not available when you select Auto Channel Selection.

Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels.

Select the check box to have the ZyXEL Device automatically scan for and select a

Selection channel which is not used by another device.

Operating This displays the channel the ZyXEL Device is currently using. Channel

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen.

Select No Security to allow wirele:

tations to communicate with the access points without

any data encryption.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.

Figure 35 Wireless: No Security

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 24 Wireless No Security

LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode | Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

4.3.2 WEP Encryption

WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key.

Your ZyXEL Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit, 128-bit or 256-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time.

In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list.

72 Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Figure 36 Wireless: Static WEP Encryption

EP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission.) & asc © Hex

The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.

Table 25 Wireless: Static WEP Encryption

LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Enter a passphrase (password phrase) of up to 32 printable characters and click Generate. The ZyXEL Device automatically generates four different WEP keys and displays them in the Key fields below. WEP Select 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP or 256-bit WEP to enable data encryption. Encryption Authentication | This field is activated when you select 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP or 256-bit WEP in Method the WEP Encryption field. Select Auto, Open System or Shared Key from the drop-down list box. ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key. Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key. The preceding "Ox", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

4.3.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Table 25 Wireless: Static WEP Encryption

LABEL DESCRIPTION Key 1 to Key 4 |The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless

stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.

If you chose 644 characters ("0-9' If you chose 1284 characters ("0-9' If you chose 256 characters ("0-9' You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1.

WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen.

Figure 37 Wireless: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Wireless Setup

F Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID)

F Hide ssiD Channel Selection Operating Channel

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 26 Wireless: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible

This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field.

Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device even when the ZyXEL Device is using WPA2- PSK or WPA2.

The encryption mechanisms used for WPA/WPA2 and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.

Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols).

ReAuthentication Timer (in seconds)

Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.

The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour).

Group Key Update Timer

The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/ WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The ZyXEL Device default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 38 Wireless: WPA/WPA2

M Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) F Hide SSID Channel Selection inel040 52000: M] A Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel-040 Security Security Mode Mra2 x

Shared Secret Accounting Server

Shared Secret EEZEZE_E_—_—--

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 27 Wireless: WPA/WPA2

LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field. Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device even when the ZyXEL Device is using WPA2-PSK or WPA2.

ReAuthentication Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in

order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 27 Wireless: WPA/WPA2

LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Key Update Timer

Authentication Servei

IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port

You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.

Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device.

The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network.

Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.

Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number

You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.

Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the ZyXEL Device.

The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

44 OTIST In a wireless network, the wireless clients must have the same SSID and security settings as the access point (AP) or wireless router (we will refer to both as “AP” here) in order to associate with it. Traditionally this meant that you had to configure the settings on the AP and then manually configure the exact same settings on each wireless client.

OTIST (One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology) allows you to transfer your AP°s SSID and WEP or WPA-PSK security settings to wireless clients that support OTIST and are within transmission range. You can also choose to have OTIST generate a WPA-PSK key for you if you didn’t configure one manually.

Note: OTIST replaces the pre-configured wireless settings on the wireless clients.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

4.4.1 Enabling OTIST You must enable OTIST on both the AP and wireless client before you start transferring settings.

Note: The AP and wireless client(s) MUST use the same Setup key.

4.4.1.1 AP You can enable OTIST using the OTIST button or the web configurator. 4.4.1.1.1 OTIST button

If you use the OTIST button, the default (01234567) or previous saved (through the web configurator) Setup key is used to encrypt the settings that you want to transfer.

Hold in the OTIST button for about two seconds. 4.4.1.1.2 Web Configurator Click the Network > Wireless LAN > OTIST. The following screen displays.

Figure 39 OTIST OTIST One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology

M Yes! Please enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA-PSK automatically if no WLAN security has been set. This will generate à random PSK key for your convenience.

78 Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 28 OTIST LABEL DESCRIPTION Setup Key

Type an OTIST Setup Key of exactly eight ASCII characters in length. The default OTIST setup key is "01234567".

Note: If you change the OTIST setup key here, you must also make the same change on the wireless client(s).

If you want OTIST to automatically generate a WPA-PSK, you must:

+ Change your security to No Security in the Wireless LAN > General screen.

+ Select the Yes! checkbox in the OTIST screen and click Apply.

+ __ The wireless screen displays an auto generated WPA-PSK and is now in WPA-PSK security mode.

The WPA-PSK security settings are assigned to the wireless client when you start OTIST.

Note: If you already have a WEP key or WPA-PSK configured in the Wireless LAN > General screen, and you run OTIST with Yes! selected, OTIST will use the existing WEP key or WPA-PSK.

Click Start to encrypt the wireless security data using the setup key and have the ZyXEL Device set the wireless station to use the same wireless settings as the ZyXEL Device. You must also activate and start OTIST on the wireless station within three minutes.

4.4.1.2 Wireless Client

Start the ZyXEL utility and click the Adapter tab. Select the OTIST check box, enter the same Setup Key as your AP’s and click Save.

> Transfer Rate: > Preamble Type:

+ Power Saving Mode:

Figure 40 Example Wireless Client OTIST Screen

‘Adapter Setting _ — _ _ _ =

Sie Survey: Profile.

(Continuous access Mode x

CE OTIST(One-Touch Intelligent Security Technology)

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

4.4.2 Starting OTIST Note: You must press the OTIST button or click Start in the AP OTIST web configurator screen and in the wireless client(s) Adapter screen all within three minutes (at the time of writing). You can start OTIST in the wireless clients and AP in any order but they must all be within range and have OTIST enabled.

1 Inthe AP, a web configurator screen pops up showing you the security settings to transfer. You can use the key in this screen to set up WEP or WPA-PSK encryption manually for non-OTIST devices in the wireless network. After reviewing the settings, click OK.

Figure 41 Security Key

Microsoft Internet Explorer

4 The security is WPA-PSK mode on WLAN now The key à EKULUWEhVU

2 This screen appears while OTIST settings are being transferred. It closes when the transfer is complete.

Figure 42 OTIST in Progress (AP) Figure 43 OTIST in Progress (Client)

? À please vrait a moment.

(about 177 Seconds )

OTIST in progress, please weitfor 3 minutes

+ Inthe wireless client, you see this screen if it can't find an OTIST-enabled AP (with the same Setup key). Click OK to go back to the ZyXEL utility main screen.

Figure 44 No AP with OTIST Found

Please make sure you have ZyKEL g+ APs orwireless routers with OTIST function enabled.

+ _Ifthere is more than one OTIST-enabled AP within range, you see a screen asking you to select one AP to get settings from.

4.4.3 Notes on OTIST

1 If you enabled OTIST in the wireless client, you see this screen each time you start the utility. Click Yes for it to search for an OTIST-enabled AP.

80 Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Figure 45 Start OTIST?

Do you wantta start OTIST function?

T° Dan'tshow me this window again

2 If an OTIST-enabled wireless client loses its wireless connection for more than ten seconds, it will search for an OTIST-enabled AP for up to one minute. (If you manually have the wireless client search for an OTIST-enabled AP, there is no timeout; click Cancel in the OTIST progress screen to stop the search.)

3 When the wireless client finds an OTIST-enabled AP, you must still click Start in the AP OTIST web configurator screen or hold in the OTIST button (for about two seconds) for the AP to transfer settings.

4 If you change the SSID or the keys on the AP after using OTIST, you need to run OTIST again or enter them manually in the wireless client(s).

5 If you configure OTIST to generate a WPA-PSK key, this key changes each time you run OTIST. Therefore, if a new wireless client joins your wireless network, you need to run OTIST on the AP and ALL wireless clients again.

The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to up to 32 devices (Allow) or exclude up to 32 devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN 81

Table 29 MAC Address Filter

LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering.

Filter Action | Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ZyXEL Device Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device.

Set This is the index number of the MAC address.

MAC Address | Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.

Wireless Advanced Setup RTS/CTS Threshold 2432 (0 = 2432) Fragmentation Threshold P2432 (256 w 2432) 802.11 Mode 802.112 F Allow non 802.11h stations

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Advanced Setup

RTS/CTS Enter a value between 0 and 2432.

Fragmentation | It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256

802.11 Mode Select 802.11b to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11g to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Select 802.11b/g to allow either IEEE802.11b or IEEE802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced. If you push the AG switch to the A side on the rear panel, this field is read-only and displays 802.11a to allow only IEEE 802.11a compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.

Allow non This field is available when you push the AG switch to the A side on the rear panel.

soztth The IEEE 802.11h standard defines two mechanisms (DFS and TPC) for IEEE

802.11a WLAN devices to avoid interference with other devices, such as satellites and military radar.

DFS (dynamic frequency selection) allows the AP to detect other devices in the same channel. If found it, the AP changes to different channel, so that the AP can avoid interference with radar systems or other wireless networks.

TPC (transmit power control) helps reduce the wireless device's transmission power to avoid interference with satellites.

Select the check box to also allow the WLAN devices which do not support IEEE 802.11h to associate with the ZyXEL Device. Otherwise, clear the check box to allow only IEEE 802.11h compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.

Chapter 4 Wireless LAN

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

84 Chapter 4 Wireless LAN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

CHAPTER 5 Wireless Tutorial

This chapter gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The wireless clients can access the Internet through an AP wirelessly.

5.1 Example Parameters

SSID SSID_Example3 Channel Auto Security WPA-PSK (Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey) 802.11 mode IEEE 802.11b/g

An access point (AP) or wireless router is referred to as “AP” and a computer with a wireless network card or USB/PCI adapter is referred to as “wireless client” here.

We use the P-334U web screens and M-302 utility screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.

5.2 Configuring the AP Flow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP.

1 Set the AG switch (on the rear panel) to the G side to have the wireless client that supports IEEE 802.11b/g be able to associate with the AP.

2 Open the Wireless LAN > General screen in the AP’s web configurator.

Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial 85

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 48 AP: Wireless LAN > General

M Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID)

F Hide ssiD Channel Selection Operating Channel

[re00 {In Seconds) Resa

3 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected.

4 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID, select a channel or select Auto Channel Selection to have the AP choose a channel which is not used by another AP and display the channel

number in the field below after you click Apply.

5 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the

Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.

6 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status.

MAC address: Narne(SSID) Channel Operating Channel Security Mode: 202 11 Mode.

7 Click the WLAN Station Status hyperlink in the AP’s Status screen. You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP.

This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network.

5.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled € and the access point is labeled AP.

AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point.

+ _Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured.

+ Manually connect to a network.

Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer.

This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is “SSID_Example3” and the pre-shared key is

“Thisismy WPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”.

After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen.

[nsssofrchnne [sons ETAT | | Network Type: intrastructure Te zems 6 62% Network Mode: 802.119 Te eva 6 62% Channek 8 © 2YEL test : 6x D]. | Security: parsk CET a MAC Address: 00: A0:C5:CD:1F.64 q RTE Fr de Surveyed at: 11:46:38 © dink4300 6 s%e |

2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer.

88 Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

3 When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting.

Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen.

Figure 51 ZyXEL Utility: Security Settings

à Encryption Type: Fra EF 2 Pre-Shared Key: [rhisiemywPa-PSkpre-sharedkey] Back Next Bt

4 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue.

Figure 52 ZyXEL Utility: Confirm Save

3 Network Name(SSID}: 551D_Example3

5 The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network. If the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this screen remain blank.

Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial 89

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 53 ZyXEL Utility: Link Info

Signal Strength ©. © 2,9 © e,0,0,©

Transmit Rate: 2 Kbps Receive Rate: D Kbps

lone Network Mode: 802,119

6 Open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is

successfully configured.

If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your

network administrator.

5.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile

A profile lets you automatically connect to the same wireless network every time you use the wireless client. You can also configure different profiles for different networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work.

This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an access point configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is “SSID_Example3”, the profile name is “PN_Example3” and the pre-shared key is “Thisismy WPA-PSKpre- sharedkey”. You have chosen the profile name “PN_Example3”.

1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next. Click Add to configure a new profile.

Figure 54 ZyXEL Utility: Profile

2 The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks, which are displayed in the Scan Info box. Click on Scan if

Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list.

Figure 55 ZyXEL Utility: Add New Profile

Add New Profit Sean nte 2 Profile Name: JPN_Exemples I SSID GE à SSID: [50 Exemples © CPE_5257_00 Me cesse 4 # Network Type: os 550 Pompes Infrastructure — Connect to an Access point a Al € Ad-Hoc -- Connect directly to other computers © ZyXEL «| Scan] [ Select Next ET

3 Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select.

4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In this example, WPA-PSK).

Figure 56 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Security

5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting.

Figure 57 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Encryption

# Encryption Type: Frip x + Pre-Shared Key: [ThisismywPA-PSKpre-sharedkey| Back Next Bt

Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial 91

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

6 In the next screen, leave both boxes checked.

Figure 58 Profile: Wireless Protocol Settings.

Wireless Protocol Sett

7 Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the next screen.

Figure 59 Profile: Confirm Save

3 Security: WPA-PSK Back Save Exit

8 Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the Activate Later button.

If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it.

Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time.

Figure 60 Profile: Activate

Your network has been configured successfully !

Activate Now Activate Later

9 When you activate the new profile, the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection.

Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

100Open your Internet browser, enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web site, your new profile is successfully configured.

111f you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary.

Chapter 5 Wireless Tutorial 93

WAN This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings.

See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN screens.

The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN ports MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address.

Otherwise, click Spoof this computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless

you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port.

6.3 Internet Connection

To change your ZyXEL Device’s Internet access settings, click Network > WAN. The screen differs by the encapsulation.

6.3.1 Ethernet Encapsulation

The screen shown next is for Ethernet encapsulation.

Encapsulation Ethernet = Service Type Standard x WAN IP Address Assignment © Get automatically from ISP (Default) © Use Fixed IP Address 1P Address Pooo IP Subnet Mask Poco Gateway IP Address Pooo DNS Servers First DNS Server [Fons Elf7225 Secand DNS Server FromsP f722152

Factory default © Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address|192 1661 53 © Set WAN MAC Addressf00 02%

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 31 Ethernet Encapsulation

LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation

You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.

Service Type Choose from Standard, Telstra (RoadRunner Telstra authentication method), RR- Manager (Roadrunner Manager authentication method), RR-Toshiba (Roadrunner Toshiba authentication method) or Telia Login. The following fields do not appear with the Standard service type.

User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.

Password Type the password associated with the user name above.

Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.

Type the authentication server IP address here if your ISP gave you one. This field is not available for Telia Login.

Type the domain name of the Telia login server, for example login1.telia.com.

Relogin Every(min) (Telia Login only)

The Telia server logs the ZyXEL Device out if the ZyXEL Device does not log in periodically. Type the number of minutes from 1 to 59 (30 default) for the ZyXEL Device to wait between logins.

WAN IP Address Assignment

LABEL DESCRIPTION Get automatically

Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the

from ISP default selection. Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.

Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field.

Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.

Address DNS Servers First DNS Server | Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the Second DNS ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) Server DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.

Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN ports MAC address by either using the ZyXEL Device's MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.

Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.

Clone the Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP

computer's MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is

address successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.

Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

6.3.2 PPPOE Encapsulation

The ZyXEL Device supports PPPOE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPOE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPOE.

For the service provider, PPPOE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius).

One of the benefits of PPPOE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Operationally, PPPOE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires

no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.

access. The screen shown next is for PPPOoE encapsulation.

Figure 62 PPPOE Encapsulation

WAN IP Address Assignment

Idle Timeout (sec) froo in seconds)

My WAN IP Address Pooo Remote IP Address Pooo Remote IP Subnet Mask Pooo Metric Fr Private No = DNS Servers First DNS Server FromsP ff7223 Second DNS Server FromisP f722152 Third DNS Server FromsP æfpono

T° Clone the computer's MAC address - 1P Address|i52 1651.33

The PPP over Ethernet choice is for a dial-up connection using PPPOE. The ZyXEL Device supports PPPOE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPOE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (i.e. xDSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. Operationally, PPPOE saves significant effort for both the end user and ISP/carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPOE directly on the router rather than individual computers, the computers on the LAN do not need PPPOE software installed, since the router does that part of the task. Further, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have access.

Type the PPPOE service name provided to you. PPPOE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPOE server.

Type the user name given to you by your ISP.

Type the password associated with the user name above.

Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.

Nailed-Up Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out. Connection Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the router automatically

disconnects from the PPPOE server.

Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the

from ISP default selection. Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Address Remote IP Enter the remote IP address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field. Address Remote IP Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field. Subnet Mask Metric This field sets this route's priority among the routes the ZyXEL Device uses. The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost". Private This parameter determines if the ZyXEL Device will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to Yes, this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast. If No, the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts. DNS Servers

Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.

Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN ports MAC address

Address by using the ZyXEL Device's MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.

Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.

Clone the Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP

computer's MAC address

address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.

Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Address

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

6.3.3 PPTP Encapsulation

PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet.

The screen shown next is for PPTP encapsulation.

Connection 1D/Name WAN IP Address Assignment

Remote IP Subnet Mask

Second DNS Server Third DNS Server

T° Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address/92.165233 T° Set WAN MAC Address/D0 15490000 02

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. The ZyXEL Device supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time.

To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection.

Type the user name given to you by your ISP.

Type the password associated with the User Name above.

Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.

Nailed-up Connection

Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out.

This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects from the PPTP server.

Get automatically from

ISP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection.

Use Fixed IP Address

Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.

Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.

Your ZyXEL Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device.

Type the IP address of the PPTP server.

Type your identification name for the PPTP server.

WAN IP Address Assignment

Get automatically from

ISP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection.

Use Fixed IP Address

Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.

Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.

Enter the remote IP address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.

Remote IP Subnet Mask

Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field.

This field sets this route's priority among the routes the ZyXEL Device uses.

The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost".

Chapter 6 WAN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

LABEL DESCRIPTION Private This parameter determines if the ZyXEL Device will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts. If set to Yes, this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast. If No, the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.

First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server

Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.

Clone the computer's MAC address

Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.

Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use. Address

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

6.4 Advanced WAN Screen

To change your ZyXEL Devic:

dvanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN >

Advanced. The screen appears as shown.

Multicast Setup Multicast Nr x Windows Networking (NetB10S over TCP/IP)

T° Allow between LAN and WAN [allow Trigger Dial

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Setup Multicast Select IGMP V-1 or IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast

Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236.

Windows Networking (NetBIlOS over TCP/IP): NetBIlOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPOE or PPTP, NetBlOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBlOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN.

Allow between LAN Select this check box to forward NetBlOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBlOS traffic.

Clear this check box to block all NetBlOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.

Allow Trigger Dial Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

104 Chapter 6 WAN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

LAN This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.

Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks.

The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses (excluding the ZyXEL Device itself) in the lower range for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have.

7.1.2 System DNS Servers

Refer to the IP Address and Subnet Mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter.

7.2 LAN TCP/IP The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.

7.2.1 Factory LAN Defaults

The LAN parameters of the ZyXEL Device are preset in the factory with the following values:

+_IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) + DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33.

These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

7.2.2 IP Address and Subnet Mask

Refer to the IP Address and Subnet Mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter for this information.

Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.

The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP- v2). At start up, the ZyXEL Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the ZyXEL Device periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the ZyXEL Device LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.

Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 35 LAN IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP/IP IP Address Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation 192.168.1.1 (factory default).

IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your

ZyXEL Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device 255.255.255.0.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The ZyXEL Device supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s IP alias settings, click Network > LAN > IP Alias. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 66 LAN IP Alias

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 36 LAN IP Alias

LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias 1,2 Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the ZyXEL Device. IP Address Enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation.

IP Subnet Mask Your ZyXEL Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP

address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

7.5 Advanced LAN Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s advanced IP settings, click Network > LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 67 Advanced LAN Multicast Setup

Multicast None x Windows Networking (NetB10S over TCP/IP)

T° Allow between LAN and WAN He] [real

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 37 Advanced LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select IGMP V-1 or IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236.

Windows Networking (NetBlOS over TCP/IP): NetBlOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPOE or PPTP, NetBlOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIlOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a

computer on the WAN.

Chapter 7 LAN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 37 Advanced LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Allow between LAN Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy

set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBlOS traffic.

Clear this check box to block all NetBIlOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

8.1 DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host

CHAPTER 8 DHCP Server

Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual

clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen displays.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 38 DHCP Server General

LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Server

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Clear it to disable the ZyXEL Device acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields.

IP Pool Starting Address

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.

LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

8.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen

This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP clients.

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,

To change your ZyXEL Devices static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server > Advanced. The following screen displays.

Figure 69 DHCP Server Advanced

DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 39 DHCP Server Advanced

# This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).

MAC Address Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN. IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN.

DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server

The ZyXEL Device passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The ZyXEL Device only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured.

First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and Second DNS Server | the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read- Third DNS Server only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.

Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. Select DNS Relay to have the ZyXEL Device act as a DNS proxy. The ZyXEL Device's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The ZyXEL Device tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the ZyXEL Device itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device forwards the query to the ZyXEL Device's system DNS server (configured in the WAN > Internet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to None after you click Apply.

Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

8.4 Client List Screen

The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the ZyXEL Device’s DHCP server.

Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click Network > DHCP Server > Client List.

Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen.

The following screen displays.

Chapter 8 DHCP Server 113

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 40 Client List

# This is the index number of the host computer.

IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.

Host Name This field displays the computer host name.

MAC Address The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).

A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address.

Reserve Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device always assign this IP address to this MAC address (and host name). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen (where you can edit them).

Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table.

This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ZyXEL Device.

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network.

9.2 Using NAT Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device.

9.2.1 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers

À port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world.

Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers.

In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded.

Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 115

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet

9.3 General NAT Screen

Click Network > NAT to open the General screen.

Figure 72 NAT General

M Enable Network Address Translation

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 41 NAT General

LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Address Translation

Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet).

Select the check box to enable NAT.

In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen.

If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ZyXEL Device discards all

packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

9.4 NAT Application Screen

Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your ZyXEL Device’s port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Application. The screen appears as shown.

Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT > General screen, the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management.

Refer to Appendix G on page 309 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 117

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

neral TT Game List Update

File Path _ Browse. |

Update Add Application Rule D active Service Name [ [User vemes | Port (Ex: 10-20,30,40) Server IP Address 0.0.0.0

10.2, 3.4 Battlefield 1942 14567,22000,23000-23009,27900,28900 172.12. 2.3

RARRRRRRRA Eù © @) ©) @ ©) © ©) ©) ©

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 42 NAT Application

LABEL DESCRIPTION Game List Update

A game list includes the pre-defined service name(s) and port number(s). You can edit and upload it to the ZyXEL Device to replace the existing entries in the second field next to Service Name.

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse. to find it.

Browse... Click Browse... to find the.txt file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (zip) files before you can upload them.

Update Click Update to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two

Add Application Rule

Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address.

Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry.

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

Table 42 NAT Application (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name

Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and Port fields.

Type a port number(s) to be forwarded.

To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last port, such as 10-20.

To specify two or more non-consecutive port numbers, separate them by a comma without spaces, such as 123,567.

Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field.

Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table.

Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one.

# This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry. Active This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled.

Name This field displays a name to identify this rule.

Port This field displays the port number(s).

This field displays the inside IP address of the server.

Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule.

Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.

9.4.1 Game List Example

Here is an example game list text file. The index number, service name and associated port(s) are specified by semi-colons (no spaces). Use the name=xxx (where xxx is the service name) to create a new service. Port range can be separated with a hyphen (-) (no spaces). Multiple (non-consecutive) ports can be separated by commas.

23;name=World of Warcraft;port=3724

9.5 Trigger Port Forwarding

Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.

Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The ZyXEL Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the ZyXEL Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port), the ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.

9.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example

The following is an example of trigger port forwarding.

Figure 75 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example

SE Internet FI Real Audio server

1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).

2 Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the ZyXEL Device to record Jane’s computer IP address. The ZyXEL Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming" port range of 6970-7170.

3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.

4 The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.

5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The ZyXEL Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).

9.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports

1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the ZyXEL Device and going to the outside.

2 If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can't trigger it.

9.6 NAT Advanced Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s trigger port settings, click Network > NAT > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.

Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time.

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) 121

Port Triggering Rules

F F F F F F F6 F F F F Fe F F F F Fe F F F F F F F F F Fe F F F F Fe F F F F Fe F F F F EF F F F F Fe F F F F Fe F F F

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 43 NAT Advanced

LABEL DESCRIPTION Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User

Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions that a host can create.

When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they may use a large number of NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet.

Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions each client computer can establish through the ZyXEL Device.

If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is using all of the available NAT sessions.

This is the rule index number (read-only).

Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces.

LABEL DESCRIPTION Incoming Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service. Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Trigger The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN. Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers. End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

10.1 Dynamic DNS Introduction

Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address.

First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is

for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.

10.1.1 DynDNS Wildcard

Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.

Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.

10.2 Dynamic DNS Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Service Provider Dynamic DNS Type Host Name

T° Enable Wildcard I Enable off line 0

1P Address Update Policy:

& Use WAN IP Address © Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address

F Enable Dynamic DNS

Dynamic DNS Option ption (Only applies to custom DNS)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 44 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.

Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.

Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider.

Host Name Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").

User Name Enter your user name.

Password Enter the password assigned to you.

Enable Wildcard Option

Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.

Enable off line option

This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line.

IP Address Update Polic:

Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to the WAN IP address.

Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address

Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) automatically by the DDNS server. It is recommended that you select this option.

Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP Address address. Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 10 Dynamic DNS P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and explains how to get started with the ZyXEL Device firewall.

11.1 Introduction to Firewall

11.11 What is a Firewall?

Originally, the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term "firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from an untrusted network. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself.

11.1.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall.

Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises.

11.13 About the ZyXEL Device Firewall

The ZyXEL Device firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box). The ZyXEL Device's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network.

Chapter 11 Firewall 127

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

The ZyXEL Device is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN.

The ZyXEL Device has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet.

The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless

the remote host is authorized to use a specific service.

11.14 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall

1 Change the default password via web configurator.

2 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port.

3 Limit who can access your router.

4 Don't enable any local service (such as SNMP or NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. À determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network.

5 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces.

6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.

7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.

11.2 General Firewall Screen

Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 45 Firewall General

LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall

Select this check box to activate the firewall. The ZyXEL Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated.

This is the direction of travel of packets.

Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.

Log Select whether to create a log for packets that are traveling in the selected direction when the packets are blocked or forwarded. To log packets related to firewall rules, make sure that Access Control under Log is selected in the Logs > Log Settings screen.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.

11.3 Services Screen

Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next.

If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This

keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed.

You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them.

ICMP Respond to Ping on LAN & WAN [wi

F Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Service Setup

F Enable Services Blocking Available Services Blocked Services

lIPSEC_TUNNEL(ESP:0) IMULTICAST(IGMP:0)

SN essenger F Select "Custom Port", you can give new port range for blacking

Type ÎTCP © Port Number [0 -p

Add Deiete Clear A Schedule to Block

Day to Block F Everydey F sun F Mon M Tue M wedM Thu M Fri M sat

Time of Day to Block (24-Hour Format) & All day

F Bypass Triangle Route Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User [512

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 46 Firewall Services

LABEL DESCRIPTION ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user.

Respond to Ping | The ZyXEL Device will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is on selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests.

130 Chapter 11 Firewall

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 46 Firewall Services

LABEL DESCRIPTION Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services

Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the ZyXEL Device by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the ZyXEL Device will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the ZyXEL Device unseen. By default this option is not selected and the ZyXEL Device will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports.

Note that the probing packets must first traverse the ZyXEL Devices firewall mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet, the ZyXEL Device reacts based on the firewall policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet. You can use the command "sys firewall tcprst rst [onloff]" to change this policy. When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without sending a response packet.

Enable Services Blocking

Select this check box to enable this feature.

This is a list of pre-defined services (ports) you may prohibit your LAN computers from using. Select the port you want to block using the drop-down list and click Add to add the port to the Blocked Services field.

This is a list of services (ports) that will be inaccessible to computers on your LAN once you enable service blocking.

Custom Port A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre-defined Available Services list and you must define using the next two fields.

Type Choose the IP port (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box.

Port Number Enter the port number range that defines the service. For example, if you want to define the Gnutella service, then select TCP type and enter a port range from 6345 to 6349.

Add Select a service from the Available Services drop-down list and then click Add to add a service to the Blocked Services

Delete Select a service from the Blocked Services list and then click Delete to remove this service from the list.

Clear All Click Clear All to empty the Blocked Services.

Day to Block: Select a check box to configure which days of the week (or everyday) you want the content filtering to be active.

Time of Day to Select the time of day you want service blocking to take effect. Configure blocking

Block (24-Hour to take effect all day by selecting AII Day. You can also configure specific times by

Format) selecting From and entering the start time in the Start (hour) and Start (min) fields and the end time in the End (hour) and End (min) fields. Enter times in 24- hour format, for example, "3:00pm" should be entered as "15:00".

Bypass Triangle Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device firewall ignore the use of triangle

Route route topology on the network. See the appendix for more on triangle route topology.

Max NAT/ÆFirewall_ | Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions

Session Per User | that a host can create.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.

Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to their needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords.

12.2 Restrict Web Features

The ZyXEL Device can block web features such as ActiveX controls, Java applets, cookies and disable web proxies.

The ZyXEL Device also allows you to define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs content filtering.

Message to display when a site is blocked

À trusted computer has full access to all blocked resources, 0.0.0.0 means there is no trusted computer. ‘Trusted Computer IP Address: [1111

Restrict Web Features

M activex [Java Î Cookies M Web Proxy

I Enable URL Keyword Blocking

Denied Access Message

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 47 Content Filter: Filter

LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted Computer IP Address

To enable this feature, type an IP address of any one of the computers in your network that you want to have as a trusted computer. This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering.

Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers.

Restrict Web Features

Select the box(es) to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a restricted feature, that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out.

ActiveX A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications. When you visit an ActiveX Web site, ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again.

À programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds.

Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID.

A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server.

Enable URL Keyword Blocking

The ZyXEL Device can block Web sites with URLS that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature.

Table 47 Content Filter: Filter

LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address.

Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added.

Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword. Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed. When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.

Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply.

Clear All Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords.

Message to display when a site is blocked.

Denied Access Enter a message to be displayed when a user tries to access a restricted web

Message site. The default message is Please contact your network administrator!!

Apply Click Apply to save your changes.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh

Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule. The following screen displays.

Figure 81 Content Filter: Schedule

Day ta Block F Everyday F sun Mmon Mu M Wed M Thu Mi I set

‘Time of Day to Black (24-Hour Format) Al day

OC From: Start |0 (hour) 10 (min) End D (hour) RP min) EN Eu

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 48 Content Filter: Schedule

LABEL DESCRIPTION Day to Block Select check boxes for the days that you want the ZyXEL Device to perform content filtering. Select the Everyday check box to have content filtering turned on all days of the week.

Time of Day to Block | Time of Day to Block allows the administrator to define during which time (24-Hour Format) periods content filtering is enabled. Time of Day to Block restrictions only apply to the keywords (see above). Restrict web server data, such as ActiveX, Java, Cookies and Web Proxy are not affected.

Select All Day to have content filtering always active on the days selected in Day to Block with time of day limitations not enforced.

Select From and enter the time period, in 24-hour format, during which content filtering will be enforced.

Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh

12.6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking

You can use commands to set how much of a website’s URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter.

12.6.1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking

By default, the ZyXEL Device checks the URL’s domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking.

This means that the ZyXEL Device checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL.

For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw.

12.6.2 Full Path URL Checking

Full path URL checking has the ZyXEL Device check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL.

For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/.

Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path.

Filename URL checking has the ZyXEL Device check all of the characters in the URL.

For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php.

Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename.

IPSec VPN This chapter explains how to set up and maintain IPSec VPNSs in the ZyXEL Device. First, it provides an overview of IPSec VPNSs. Then, it introduces each screen for IPSec VPN in the ZyXEL Device. This chapter applies to the P-335U.

13.1 IPSec VPN Overview

À virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. À secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control and auditing. It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP/IP for communication.

Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the Internet. IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication at the IP layer.

The following figure provides one perspective of a VPN tunnel. Figure 82 VPN: Example

The VPN tunnel connects the ZyXEL Device (X) and the remote IPSec router (Y). These routers then connect the local network (A) and remote network (B).

À VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases. Each phase establishes a security association (SA), a contract indicating what security parameters the ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router will use. The first phase establishes an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) SA between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network. The following figure illustrates this.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN 139

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 83 VPN: IKE SA and IPSec SA In this example, a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B. Inside networks A and B, the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks. Between routers X and Y, the data is protected by tunneling, encryption, authentication, and other security features of the IPSec SA. The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA that routers X and Y established first.

The rest of this section discusses IKE SA and IPSec SA in more detail.

13.1.1 IKE SA (IKE Phase 1) Overview

The IKE SA provides a secure connection between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router.

It takes several steps to establish an IKE SA. The negotiation mode determines the number of steps to use. There are two negotiation modes--main mode and aggressive mode. Main mode provides better security, while aggressive mode is faster.

Note: Both routers must use the same negotiation mode.

These modes are discussed in more detail in Negotiation Mode on page 143. Main mode is used in various examples in the rest of this section.

13.1.1.1 IP Addresses of the ZyXEL Device and Remote IPSec Router In the ZyXEL Device, you have to specify the IP addresses of the ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router to establish an IKE SA. You can usually provide a static IP address or a domain name for the ZyXEL Device. Sometimes, your ZyXEL Device might also offer another alternative, such as using the IP address of a port or interface.

You can usually provide a static IP address or a domain name for the remote IPSec router as well. Sometimes, you might not know the IP address of the remote IPSec router (for example, telecommuters). In this case, you can still set up the IKE SA, but only the remote IPSec router can initiate an IKE SA.

This section provides more details about IKE SAs.

140 Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

13.1.2.1 IKE SA Proposal

The IKE SA proposal is used to identify the encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and Diffie-Hellman (DH) key group that the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router use in the IKE SA. In main mode, this is done in steps 1 and 2, as illustrated below.

Figure 84 IKE SA: Main Negotiation Mode, Steps 1 - 2: IKE SA Proposal

< 2 Y The ZyXEL Device sends a proposal to the remote IPSec router. Each proposal consists of an encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and DH key group that the ZyXEL Device wants to use in the IKE SA. The remote IPSec router sends the accepted proposal back to the ZyXEL Device. If the remote IPSec router rejects the proposal (for example, ifthe VPN tunnel is not configured correctly), the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router cannot establish an IKE SA.

Note: Both routers must use the same encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and DH key group.

See the field descriptions for information about specific encryption algorithms, authentication algorithms, and DH key groups. See Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Exchange on page 141 for more information about DH key groups.

13.1.2.2 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Exchange

The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router use a DH key exchange to establish a shared secret, which is used to generate encryption keys for IKE SA and IPSec SA. In main mode, the DH key exchange is done in steps 3 and 4, as illustrated below.

Figure 85 IKE SA: Main Negotiation Mode, Steps 3 - 4: DH Key Exchange

The DH key exchange is based on DH key groups. Each key group is a fixed number of bits long. The longer the key, the more secure the encryption keys, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. For example, DH2 keys (1024 bits) are more secure than DHI keys (768 bits), but DH2 encryption keys take longer to encrypt and decrypt.

13.1.2.3 Authentication

Before the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router establish an IKE SA, they have to verify each other’s identity. This process is based on pre-shared keys and router identities.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN 141

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

In main mode, the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router authenticate each other in steps 5 and 6, as illustrated below. Their identities are encrypted using the encryption algorithm and encryption key the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router selected in previous steps.

Figure 86 IKE SA: Main Negotiation Mode, Steps 5 - 6: Authentication

The ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router use a pre-shared key in the authentication process, though it is not actually transmitted or exchanged.

Note: The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same pre-shared key.

Router identity consists of ID type and ID content. The ID type can be IP address, domain name, or e-mail address, and the ID content is a specific IP address, domain name, or e-mail address. The ID content is only used for identification; the IP address, domain name, or e-mail address that you enter does not have to actually exist.

The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router each has its own identity, so each one must store two sets of information, one for itself and one for the other router. Local ID type and ID content refers to the ID type and ID content that applies to the router itself, and peer ID type and ID content refers to the ID type and ID content that applies to the other router in the IKE SA.

Note: The ZyXEL Device’s local and peer ID type and ID content must match the remote IPSec router's peer and local ID type and ID content, respectively.

In the following example, the ID type and content match so the ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router authenticate each other successfully.

Table 49 VPN Example: Matching ID Type and Content

ZYXEL DEVICE REMOTE IPSEC ROUTER Local ID type: E-mail Local ID type: IP Local ID content: tom@yourcompany.com Local ID content: 1.1.1.2

Peer ID type: IP Peer ID type: E-mail

Peer ID content: 1.1.1.2 Peer ID content: tom@yourcompany.com

In the following example, the ID type and content do not match so the authentication fails and the ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router cannot establish an IKE SA.

Table 50 VPN Example: Mismatching ID Type and Content

ZYXEL DEVICE REMOTE IPSEC ROUTER Local ID type: E-mail Local ID type: IP Local ID content: tom@yourcompany.com Local ID content: 1.1.1.2

ZYXEL DEVICE REMOTE IPSEC ROUTER Peer ID type: IP Peer ID type: E-mail Peer ID content: 1.1.1.15 Peer ID content: tom@yourcompany.com

13.1.2.4 Negotiation Mode

There are two negotiation modes: main mode and aggressive mode. Main mode provides better security, while aggressive mode is faster.

Main mode takes six steps to establish an IKE SA.

Steps 1-2: The ZyXEL Device sends its proposals to the remote IPSec router. The remote IPSec router selects an acceptable proposal and sends it back to the ZyXEL Device.

Steps 3-4: The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router participate in a Diffie-Hellman key exchange, based on the accepted DH key group, to establish a shared secret.

Steps 5-6: Finally, the ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router generate an encryption key

from the shared secret, encrypt their identities, and exchange their encrypted identity information for authentication.

In contrast, aggressive mode only takes three steps to establish an IKE SA.

Step 1: The ZyXEL Device sends its proposals to the remote IPSec router. It also starts the Diffie-Hellman key exchange and sends its (unencrypted) identity to the remote IPSec router for authentication.

Step 2: The remote IPSec router selects an acceptable proposal and sends it back to the ZyXEL Device. It also finishes the Diffie-Hellman key exchange, authenticates the ZyXEL Device, and sends its (unencrypted) identity to the ZyXEL Device for authentication.

Step 3: The ZyXEL Device authenticates the remote IPSec router and confirms that the IKE SA is established.

Aggressive mode does not provide as much security as main mode because the identity of the ZyXEL Device and the identity of the remote IPSec router are not encrypted. It is usually used when the address of the initiator is not known by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared keys for authentication (for example, telecommuters).

13.1.2.5 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal In the following example, there is another router (A) between router X and router Y. Figure 87 VPN/NAT Example

X A D Y If router A does NAT, it might change the IP addresses, port numbers, or both. If router X and router Y try to establish a VPN tunnel, the authentication fails because it depends on this information. The routers cannot establish a VPN tunnel.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN 143

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Most routers like router À now have an IPSec pass-through feature. This feature helps router A recognize VPN packets and route them appropriately. If router A has this feature, router X and router Y can establish a VPN tunnel as long as the IPSec protocol is ESP. (See IPSec Protocol on page 144 for more information about active protocols.)

If router A does not have an IPSec pass-through or if the IPSec protocol is AH, you can solve this problem by enabling NAT traversal. In NAT traversal, router X and router Y add an extra header to the IKE SA and IPSec SA packets. If you configure router A to forward these packets unchanged, router X and router Y can establish a VPN tunnel.

You have to do the following things to set up NAT traversal.

+ Enable NAT traversal on the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. + Configure the NAT router to forward packets with the extra header unchanged.

The extra header may be UDP port 500 or UDP port 4500, depending on the standard(s) the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router support.

13.1.3 IPSec SA (IKE Phase 2) Overview

Once the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router have established the IKE SA, they can securely negotiate an IPSec SA through which to send data between computers on the networks.

Note: The IPSec SA stays connected even if the underlying IKE SA is not available anymore.

This section introduces the key components of an IPSec SA.

13.1.3.1 Local Network and Remote Network

In an IPSec SA, the local network consists of devices connected to the ZyXEL Device and may be called the local policy. Similarly, the remote network consists of the devices connected to the remote IPSec router and may be called the remote policy.

Note: lt is not recommended to set a VPN rule’s local and remote network settings both to 0.0.0.0 (any). This causes the ZyXEL Device to try to forward all access attempts (to the local network, the Internet or even the ZyXEL Device) to the remote IPSec router. In this case, you can no longer manage the ZyXEL Device.

13.1.3.2 IPSec Protocol

The IPSec protocol controls the format of each packet. It also specifies how much of each packet is protected by the encryption and authentication algorithms. IPSec VPN includes two IPSec protocols, AH (Authentication Header, RFC 2402) and ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload, RFC 2406).

Usually, you should select ESP. AH does not support encryption, and ESP is more suitable with NAT.

13.1.3.3 Encapsulation

There are two ways to encapsulate packets. Usually, you should use tunnel mode because it is more secure. Transport mode is only used when the IPSec SA is used for communication between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router (for example, for remote management), not between computers on the local and remote networks.

Note: The ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router must use the same encapsulation.

These modes are illustrated below. Figure 88 VPN: Transport and Tunnel Mode Encapsulation

Original Packet IP Header | TCP Data Header

Transport Mode Packet IP Header | AH/ESP TCP Data Header Header

In tunnel mode, the ZyXEL Device As a result, there are two IP headers:

es the IPSec protocol to encapsulate the entire IP packet.

+ Outside header: The outside IP header contains the IP address of the ZyXEL Device or remote IPSec router, whichever is the destination.

+ Inside header: The inside IP header contains the IP address of the computer behind the ZyXEL Device or remote IPSec router. The header for the IPSec protocol (AH or ESP) appears between the IP headers.

In transport mode, the encapsulation depends on the IPSec protocol. With AH, the ZyXEL Device includes part of the original IP header when it encapsulates the packet. With ESP, however, the ZyXEL Device does not include the IP header when it encapsulates the packet, so it is not possible to verify the integrity of the source IP address.

13.1.3.4 IPSec SA Proposal and Perfect Forward Secrecy

An IPSec SA proposal is similar to an IKE SA proposal (see IKE SA Proposal on page 141), except that you also have the choice whether or not the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router perform a new DH key exchange every time an IPSec SA is established. This is called Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS).

If you enable PFS, the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router perform a DH key exchange every time an IPSec SA is established, changing the root key from which encryption keys are generated. As a result, if one encryption key is compromised, other encryption keys remain secure.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN 145

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

If you do not enable PFS, the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router use the same root key that was generated when the IKE SA was established to generate encryption keys.

The DH key exchange is time-consuming and may be unnecessary for data that does not require such security.

13.1.4 Additional IPSec VPN Topics

This section discusses other IPSec VPN topics that apply to either IKE SAs or IPSec SAs or both. Relationships between the topics are also highlighted.

13.1.4.1 SA Life Time

SAS have a lifetime that specifies how long the SA lasts until it times out. When an SA times out, the ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the SA in the following situations:

+ There is traffic when the SA life time expires

+ The IPSec SA is configured on the ZyXEL Device as nailed up (see below)

Otherwise, the ZyXEL Device must re-negotiate the SA the next time someone wants to send traffic.

Note: If the IKE SA times out while an IPSec SA is connected, the IPSec SA stays connected.

An IPSec SA can be set to keep alive Normally, the ZyXEL Device drops the IPSec SA when the life time expires or after two minutes of outbound traffic with no inbound traffic. If you set the IPSec SA to keep alive , the ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA when the SA life time expires, and it does not drop the IPSec SA if there is no inbound traffic.

Note: The SA life time and keep alive settings only apply if the rule identifies the remote IPSec router by a static IP address or a domain name. If the Secure Gateway Address field is set to 0.0.0.0, the ZyXEL Device cannot initiate the tunnel (and cannot renegotiate the SA).

13.1.4.2 Encryption and Authentication Algorithms

In most ZyXEL Devices, you can select one of the following encryption algorithms for each proposal. The encryption algorithms are listed here in order from weakest to strongest. + Data Encryption Standard (DES) is a widely used (but breakable) method of data encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data. + Triple DES (3DES) is a variant of DES. It iterates three times with three separate keys, effectively tripling the strength of DES.

You can select one of the following authentication algorithms for each proposal. The algorithms are listed here in order from weakest to strongest.

+ MDS5 (Message Digest 5) produces a 128-bit digest to authenticate packet data. + SHAI (Secure Hash Algorithm) produces a 160-bit digest to authenticate packet data.

146 Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

13.2 Remote DNS Server

In cases where you want to use domain names to access Intranet servers on a remote network that has a DNS server, you must identify that DNS server. You cannot use DNS servers on the LAN or from the ISP since these DNS servers cannot resolve domain names to private IP addresses on the remote network

The following figure depicts an example where three VPN tunnels are created from ZyXEL Device A; one to branch office 2, one to branch office 3 and another to headquarters. In order to access computers that use private domain names on the headquarters (HQ) network, the ZyXEL Device at branch office 1 uses the Intranet DNS server in headquarters. The DNS server feature for VPN does not work with Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

Figure 89 VPN Host using Intranet DNS Server Example

If you do not specify an Intranet DNS server on the remote network, then the VPN host must use IP addresses to access the computers on the remote network.

Click Security > VPN to display the Summary screen. This is a read-only menu of your VPN rules (tunnels). Edit a VPN by clicking the Edit icon.

Figure 90 Security > VPN > Summary

nca] nca âge | ramate add [= Encop- [EM (= Gacansy | Mau

2 ÉA Chapter 13 IPSec VPN 147

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 51 Security > VPN > Summary

LABEL DESCRIPTION # This is the VPN policy index number. Active This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not. This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled. Local Addr. This displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses or a (static) IP address

and a subnet mask of computer(s) on your local network behind your ZyXEL Device.

This displays the beginning and ending (static) IP addresses or a (static) IP address and a subnet mask of computer(s) on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router.

This field displays 0.0.0.0 when the Secure Gateway Address field displays 0.0.0.0. In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.

Encap. This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode (Tunnel is the default selection).

Algorithm This field displays the security protocol, encryption algorithm and authentication algorithm used for an SA.

Gateway This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router. This field displays 0.0.0.0 when you configure the Secure Gateway Address field in the Rule Setup screen to 0.0.0.0.

Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the VPN rule.

Click the Remove icon to remove an existing VPN rule.

13.4 VPN Rule Setup (IKE)

À VPN (Virtual Private Network) tunnel gives you a secure connection to another computer or

This figure helps explain the main fields in the VPN setup.

Figure 91 IPSec Fields Summary

Local Network Remote Network

Up? Local Network EI 1

Use this screen to configure a VPN policy.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Figure 92 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Basic)

1PSec Keying Mode CE DNS Server (for IPSec VPN) Poos Local Policy

Local Address End/Mask Eooo Remote Policy

Remote Address Start Pos

Remote Address End/Mask Gooo

Authentication Method

My 1P Address Local ID Type Local Content Secure Gateway Address Peer ID Type

Encapsulation Mode 1PSec Protocol Pre-Shared Key Encryption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Basic)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Property Active Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. This option determines whether

a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall.

Keep Alive Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device automatically reinitiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out, even if there is no traffic. The remote IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN 149

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 52 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Basic) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Traversal

Select this check box to enable NAT traversal. NAT traversal allows you to set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.

Note: The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled. See Section 13.1.2.5 on page 143 for more information.

You can use NAT traversal with ESP protocol using Transport or Tunnel mode, but not with AH protocol nor with manual key management. In order for an IPSec router behind a NAT router to receive an initiating IPSec packet, set the NAT router to forward UDP ports 500 and 4500 to the IPSec router behind the NAT router.

Select IKE or Manual from the drop-down list box. IKE provides more protection so it is generally recommended. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management.

DNS Server (for IPSec VPN)

If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here. The ZyXEL Device assigns this additional DNS server to the ZyXEL Device's DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses.

A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names.

Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.

Two active SAs can have the same configured local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway Address field and the LAN's full IP address range as the local IP address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.

For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

Local Address End 1Mask

When the local IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.

When the local IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

When the local IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured local IP addresses. The remote fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway IP Address field is configured to 0.0.0.0. In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.

Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 52 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Basic) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Address

For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

When the remote IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.

End /Mask When the remote IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the remote IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

Enter the ZyXEL Device's static WAN IP address (if it has one) or leave the field set to 0.0.0.0.

The ZyXEL Device uses its current WAN IP address (static or dynamic) in setting up the VPN tunnel if you leave this field as 0.0.0.0. If the WAN connection goes down, the ZyXEL Device uses the dial backup IP address for the VPN tunnel when using dial backup or the LAN IP address when using traffic redirect. Otherwise, you can enter one of the dynamic domain names that you have configured (in the DDNS screen) to have the ZyXEL Device use that dynamic domain name's IP address.

The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if My IP Address changes after setup.

Select IP to identify this ZyXEL Device by its IP address. Select DNS to identify this ZyXEL Device by a domain name. Select E-mail to identify this ZyXEL Device by an e-mail address.

When you select IP in the Local ID Type field, type the IP address of your computer in the Local Content field. The ZyXEL Device automatically uses the IP address in the My IP Address field (refer to the My IP Address field description) if you configure the Local Content field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank. It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 in the Local Content field or use the Domain Name or E-mail ID type in the following situations.

+ When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.

+ When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.

When you select Domain Name or E-mail in the Local ID Type field, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify this ZyXEL Device in the Local Content field. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN

Table 52 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Basic) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Secure Gateway Address

Type the WAN IP address or the domain name (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection. Set this field to 0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address (the IPSec Keying Mode field must be set to IKE).

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

Note: You can also enter a remote secure gateway's domain name in the Secure Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The ZyXEL Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateway's WAN IP address changes (there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateway's new WAN IP address).

Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address. Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name. Select E-mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e-mail address.

The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type.

For IP, type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection. If you configure this field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank, the ZyXEL Device will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field (refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description).

For Domain Name or E-mail, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.

It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 or use the Domain Name or E-mail ID type in the following situations:

+ When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.

+ When you want the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between VPN connection

requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.

Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box.

Select the security protocols used for an SA.

Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and communications latency (delay).

If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields (described below).

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 52 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Basic) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre-Shared Key

Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. lt is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.

Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "Ox” (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in "Ox0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF" is the key itself.

Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a “PYLD_MALFORMED" (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends.

Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use for data communications.

Algorithm Choices are: DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and key , which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.

Authentication Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are

Algorithm SHA and MD5. SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower.

Advanced... Click Advanced... to configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

13.5 Advanced VPN Rule Setup (IKE)

Click Advanced... in the Rule Setup screen to open this screen.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 93 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Advanced)

SA Monitor | Global setting

Local Address Local Port Start

Local Port End Remote Policy

Remote Address Start Remote Address End/Mask Remote Port Start

_— = =— = = — =—— = Remote Port End | My IP Address Fu Local ID Type FE Local Content ns | Secure Gateway Address ns | F3 EE _—_ El = ER Fe 3 Ex

Peer ID Type Peer Content

Negotiation Mode Encryption Algorithm Des Authentication Algorithm

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Advanced)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Property

Active Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall.

NAT Traversal Select this check box to enable NAT traversal. NAT traversal allows you to set

up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.

Note: The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled. See Section 13.1.2.5 on page 143 for more information.

Enter 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP, etc. 0 is the default and signifies any protocol.

Enable Replay Detection

As a VPN setup is processing intensive, the system is vulnerable to Denial of Service (DoS) attacks The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against replay attacks. Select YES from the drop-down menu to enable replay detection, or select NO to disable it.

DNS Server (for IPSec VPN)

A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names.

Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN

Table 53 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Advanced) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Local Address

For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

Local Address End / Mask

When the local IP address is a single address, type it a second time here. When the local IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

When the local IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

Ois the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to 65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.

Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If Local Port Start is left at 0, Local Port End will also remain at O.

For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

Remote Address End /Mask

When the remote IP address is a single address, type it a second time here. When the remote IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

When the remote IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

Ois the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to 65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.

Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If Remote Port Start is left at 0, Remote Port End will also remain at O.

Table 53 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Advanced) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION My IP Address

Enter the ZyXEL Device's static WAN IP address (if it has one) or leave the field set to 0.0.0.0.

Otherwise, you can enter one of the dynamic domain names that you have configured (in the DDNS screen) to have the ZyXEL Device use that dynamic domain name's IP address.

The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if My IP Address changes after setup.

Select IP to identify this ZyXEL Device by its IP address. Select DNS to identify this ZyXEL Device by a domain name. Select E-mail to identify this ZyXEL Device by an e-mail address.

It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 in the Local Content field or use the Domain Name or E-mail ID type in the following situations.

+ When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.

+ When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.

Secure Gateway Address

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

Table 53 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Advanced) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Peer Content

The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type.

For IP, type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection. f you configure this field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank, the ZyXEL Device will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field (refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description).

It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 or use the Domain Name or E-mail ID type in the following situations:

+ When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.

+ When you want the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between VPN connection

requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.

Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode.

Encryption Algorithm

Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:

DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm

The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and keys. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.

Authentication Algorithm

Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data in the IKE SA. Choices are SHA1 and MD5. SHAÏ is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower.

SA Life Time (Seconds)

Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It may range from 180 to 3,000,000 seconds (almost 35 days).

A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.

Select which Diffie-Hellman key group (DHx) you want to use for encryption keys. Choices are:

DH1 - use a 768-bit random number DH2 - use a 1024-bit random number

Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.

Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key With a "Ox” (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in "Ox0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF" is the key itself.

Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a “PYLD_MALFORMED” (payload malformed) packet if the same pre- shared key is not used on both ends.

Table 53 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: IKE (Advanced) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION IPSec Protocol

Select the security protocols used for an SA. Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and communications latency (delay).

If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields (described below).

Encryption Algorithm

Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:

DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm

The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and keys. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.

Authentication Algorithm

Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data in the IPSec SA. Choices are SHA1 and MD5. SHAÏ is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower.

Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field. The minimum value is 180 seconds.

Perfect Forward Secret (PFS)

Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) and, if you do, which Diffie-Hellman key group to use for encryption. Choices are:

None - disable PFS DH1 - enable PFS and use a 768-bit random number DH2 - enable PFS and use a 1024-bit random number

PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA. It is more secure but takes more time.

.… to go to the previous VPN configuration screen.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

13.6 IPSec SA Using Manual Keys

You might set up an IPSec SA using manual keys when you want to establish a VPN tunnel quickly, for example, for troubleshooting. You should only do this as a temporary solution, however, because it is not as secure as a regular IPSec SA.

In IPSec SAs using manual keys, the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router do not establish an IKE SA. They only establish an IPSec SA. As a result, an IPSec SA using manual keys has some characteristics of IKE SA and some characteristics of IPSec SA. There are also some differences between IPSec SA using manual keys and other types of SA.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN

13.6.1 IPSec SA Proposal Using Manual Keys

In IPSec SA using manual keys, you can only specify one encryption algorithm and one authentication algorithm. There is no DH key exchange, so you have to provide the encryption key and the authentication key the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router use.

Note: The ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router must use the same encryption key and authentication key.

13.6.2 Authentication and the Security Parameter Index (SPI)

For authentication, the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router use the SPL, instead of pre- shared keys, ID type and content. The SPI is an identification number.

Note: The ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI.

13.7 VPN Rule Setup (Manual)

Refer to Figure 91 on page 148 for a graphical representation of the fields in the web configurator.

Select Manual in the IPSec Keying Mode field on the Rule Setup screen to open the screen as shown next.

Use this screen to configure VPN rules (tunnels) that use manual keys. Manual key management is useful if you have problems with IKE key management.

See Section 13.6 on page 159 for more information about IPSec SAs using manual keys.

Local Part Start Local Port End

DNS Server (for IPSec VPN) Pooo

Local Address End/Mask

Remote Address Start Pooo Remote Address End/Mask Pooo Remote Port Start

Secure Gateway Address Coco

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: Manual

LABEL DESCRIPTION Property

Active Select this check box to activate this VPN policy.

IPSec Keying Select IKE or Manual from the drop-down list box. IKE provides more protection Mode so it is generally recommended. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if

you have problems using IKE key management.

Enter 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP, etc. 0 is the default and signifies any protocol.

Table 54 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: Manual (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION DNS Server (for | Ifthere is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here.

IPSec VPN) The ZyXEL Device assigns this additional DNS server to the ZyXEL Device's DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses. A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names.

Local Policy Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's

configured remote IP addresses.

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

Local Address End /Mask

When the local IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.

When the local IP address is a range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

When the local IP address is a subnet address, enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.

Ois the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to 65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.

Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If Local Port Start is left at O, Local Port End will also remain at O.

For a single IP address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

For a specific range of IP addresses, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

To specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 54 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: Manual (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Address | When the remote IP address is a single address, type it a second time here.

Remote Port Ois the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to 65535. Some

Start of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23, Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25,

Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If Remote Port Start is left at O, Remote Port End will also remain at O.

Enter the ZyXEL Device's static WAN IP address (if it has one) or leave the field set to 0.0.0.0.

Otherwise, you can enter one of the dynamic domain names that you have configured (in the DDNS screen) to have the ZyXEL Device use that dynamic domain name's IP address.

The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if My IP Address changes after setup.

Secure Gateway Address

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

SPI Type a unique SPI (Security Parameter Index) from one to four characters long. Valid Characters are "O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9".

Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box.

Enable Replay Detection

Table 54 Security > VPN > Rule Setup: Manual (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION IPSec Protocol Select the security protocols used for an SA. Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and communications latency (delay).

If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields (described below).

Encryption Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are: Algorithm DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm

The ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same algorithms and keys. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput.

Encryption Key This field is applicable when you select ESP in the IPSec Protocol field above. With DES, type a unique key 8 characters long. With 3DES, type a unique key 24 characters long. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated.

Authentication Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data in the IPSec SA. Algorithm Choices are SHA1 and MD5. SHAÏ is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower.

Authentication Type a unique authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable. Enter 16 Key characters for MD5 authentication or 20 characters for SHA-1 authentication. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

In the web configurator, click SECURITY > VPN > SA Monitor. Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections.

A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel. This screen displays active VPN connections. Use Refresh to display active VPN connections.

Figure 95 Security > VPN > SA Monitor

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 SECURITY > VPN > SA Monitor

DESCRIPTION # This is the security association index number. Name This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.

This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode.

IPSec Algorithm This field displays the security protocols used for an SA. Both AH and ESP increase ZyXEL Device processing requirements and communications latency (delay).

Refresh Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection(s).

13.9 VPN Global Setting

Click SECURITY > VPN > Global Setting to open the VPN Global Setting screen. Use this screen to change settings that apply to all of your VPN tunnels.

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Security > VPN > Global Setting

DESCRIPTION Windows Networking (NetBlOS over TCP/IP) | enable a computer to find other computers. It may sometimes be necessary

NetBlOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that

to allow NetBlOS packets to pass through VPN tunnels in order to allow local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa.

Allow NetBlOS Traffic | Select this check box to send NetBlOS packets through the VPN connection. Through IPSec Tunnel

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

13.10 Telecommuter VPN/IPSec Examples

The following examples show how multiple telecommuters can make VPN connections to a single ZyXEL Device at headquarters. The telecommuters use IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters has a static public IP address.

See the following figure and table for an example configuration that allows multiple telecommuters (A, B and C in the figure) to use one VPN rule to simultaneously access a ZyXEL Device at headquarters (HQ in the figure). The telecommuters do not have domain names mapped to the WAN IP addresses of their IPSec routers. The telecommuters must all use the same IPSec parameters but the local IP addresses (or ranges of addresses) should not

FIELDS TELECOMMUTERS HEADQUARTERS My ZyXEL Device:

0.0.0.0 (dynamic IP address assigned by the ISP)

Public static IP address

Remote Gateway Address:

Public static IP address

0.0.0.0 With this IP address only the telecommuter can initiate the IPSec tunnel.

Local Network - Single IP Address:

Telecommuter A: 192.168.2.12 Telecommuter B: 192.168.3.2 Telecommuter C: 192.168.4.15

Remote Network - Single IP Address:

13.10.2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example

In this example the telecommuters (A, B and C in the figure) use IPSec routers with domain names that are mapped to their dynamic WAN IP addresses (use Dynamic DNS to do this).

With aggressive negotiation mode (see Section 13.1.2.4 on page 143), the ZyXEL Device can use the ID types and contents to distinguish between VPN rules. Telecommuters can each use a separate VPN rule to simultaneously access a ZyXEL Device at headquarters. They can use different IPSec parameters. The local IP addresses (or ranges of addresses) of the rules configured on the ZyXEL Device at headquarters can overlap. The local IP addresses of the rules configured on the telecommuters’ IPSec routers should not overlap.

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

See the following table and figure for an example where three telecommuters each use a different VPN rule for a VPN connection with a ZyXEL Device located at headquarters. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters (HQ in the figure) identifies each incoming SA by its ID type and content and uses the appropriate VPN rule to establish the VPN connection.

The ZyXEL Device at headquarters can also initiate VPN connections to the telecommuters since it can find the telecommuters by resolving their domain names.

Figure 98 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example

All Headquarters Rules:

My ZyXEL Device 0.0.0.0

My ZyXEL Device: bigcompanyhq.com

Remote Gateway Address: bigcompanyhq.com

Local Network - Single IP Address: 192.168.1.10

Remote Network - Single IP Address: 192.168.1.10

Local ID Type: E-mail

Peer ID Type: E-mail

Local ID Content: bob@bigcompanyhq.com

Peer ID Content: bobb@bigcompanyhq.com

Telecommuter A (telecommutera.dydns.org)

Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 1:

Local ID Type: IP Peer ID Type: IP Local ID Content: 192.168.2.12

Peer ID Content: 192.168.2.12

Local IP Address: 192.168.2.12

Remote Address 192.168.2.12

Telecommuter B (telecommuterb.dydns.org)

Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 2:

Local ID Type: DNS Peer ID Type: DNS Local ID Content: telecommuterb.com

Peer ID Content: telecommuterb.com

Local IP Address: 192.168.3.2

TELECOMMUTERS HEADQUARTERS Telecommuter C (telecommuterc.dydns.org) Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 3: Local ID Type: E-mail Peer ID Type: E-mail Local ID Content: myVPN@myplace.com Peer ID Content: myVPN@myplace.com Local IP Address: 192.168.4.15 Remote Gateway Address: telecommuterc.dydns.org Remote Address 192.168.4.15

13.11 VPN and Remote Management

You can allow someone to use a service (like Telnet or HTTP) through a VPN tunnel to manage the ZyXEL Device. One of the ZyXEL Device’s ports must be part of the VPN rule’s local network. This can be the ZyXEL Device’s LAN port if you do not want to allow remote management on the WAN port. You also have to configure remote management (REMOTE MGMT) to allow management access for the service through the specific port.

In the following example, the VPN rule’s local network (A) includes the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address of 192.168.1.7. Someone in the remote network (B) can use a service (like HTTP for example) through the VPN tunnel to access the ZyXEL Device’s LAN interface. Remote management must also be configured to allow HTTP access on the ZyXEL Device’s LAN interface.

Figure 99 VPN for Remote Management Example

Chapter 13 IPSec VPN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

CHAPTER 14 Static Route Screens

This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your ZyXEL Device.

14.1 Static Route Overview

Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected, and the ZyXEL Device has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the ZyXEL Device knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node router R1. However, the ZyXEL Device is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn't know that there is a route through the same remote node router R1 (via gateway router R2). The static routes are for you to tell the ZyXEL Device about the networks beyond the remote nodes.

Figure 100 Example of Static Routing Topology

Chapter 14 Static Route Screens 169

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

14.2 IP Static Route Screen

Click Management > Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen. The following screen

Figure 101 IP Static Route

RARRRRREA CLLELTILE]

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 59 IP Static Route

# This is the index number of an individual static route. The first entry is for the default route and not editable.

Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route.

Active This icon is turned on when this static route is active.

Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static Route Setup screen to enable the static route. Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry.

Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number.

Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your ZyXEL Device that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your ZyXEL Device; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes.

Modify Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen. Modify a static route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen.

Click the Remove icon to delete a static route.

Chapter 14 Static Route Screens

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

14.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen

To edit a static route, click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Fill in the required information for each static route.

Figure 102 Static Route Setup

Route Name PF active

F private Destination 1P Address 1P Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 60 Static Route Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route.

Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.

Private This parameter determines if the ZyXEL Device will include this route to a remote

node in its RIP broadcasts.

Select this check box to keep this route private and not included in RIP broadcasts. Clear this checkbox to propagate this route to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.

Destination IP Address

This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.

Enter the IP subnet mask here.

Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of

Address your ZyXEL Device that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your ZyXEL Device; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes.

Metric Metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes.

Chapter 14 Static Route Screens 171

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

172 Chapter 14 Static Route Screens

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

CHAPTER 15 Bandwidth Management

This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management, editing rules and viewing the ZyXEL Device’s bandwidth management logs.

15.1 Bandwidth Management Overview

ZyXEL’s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and/or subnet. You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to different bandwidth rules.

The ZyXEL Device applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface. The ZyXEL Device does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface.

Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router, regardless of the traffic's source.

Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the ZyXEL Device and be managed by bandwidth management.

+ The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN, WLAN to WLAN / ZyXEL Device) must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen.

+ The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port (WAN to LAN, WLAN to LAN, LAN to LAN / ZyXEL Device) must be less than or equal to 100,000 kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the LAN port).

+ The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WLAN port (LAN to WLAN, WAN to WLAN, WLAN to WLAN / ZyXEL Device) must be less than or equal to 54,000 kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the WLAN port).

15.2 Application-based Bandwidth Management

You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, E- mail and Video for example).

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 173

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

15.3 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management

You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets.

The following figure shows LAN subnets. You could configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B.

Figure 103 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example

LAN WAN A 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.24

= B 192.168.21-402.168.224

15.4 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management

You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an application. The following example table shows bandwidth allocations for application specific traffic from separate LAN subnets.

Table 61 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example

FROM SUBNET A FROM SUBNET B VolP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Web 64 Kbps 64 Kbps FTP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps E-mail 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Video 64 Kbps 64 Kbps

The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through an interface.

PRIORITY LEVELS: TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED.

Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).

Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.

This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.

15.6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services

The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management using the wizard screens.

Table 63 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services

SERVICE DESCRIPTION Xbox Live

This is Microsoft's online gaming service that lets you play multiplayer Xbox games on the Internet via broadband technology. Xbox Live uses port 3074.

Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VolP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VolP. SIP is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet.

SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP, using the default port number 5060.

FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. FTP uses port number 21.

Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:

POP3 - port 110 IMAP - port 143 SMTP - port 25 HTTP - port 80

These programs use advanced file sharing applications relying on central servers to search for files. They use default port 4662.

BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file.

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 175

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 63 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services (continued)

SERVICE DESCRIPTION MSN Webcam

MSN messenger allows you to chat online and send instant messages. If you use MSN messenger and also have a webcam, you can send your image/photo in real- time along with messages

WWW The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper- linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the Worid Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser.

15.6.1 Services and Port Numbers

The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Next to the name of the service, two fields appear in brackets. The first field indicates the IP protocol type (TCP, UDP, or ICMP). The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service. (Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type. For example, look at the DNS service. (UDP/TCP:53) means

UDP port 53 and TCP port 53.

Table 64 Commonly Used Services

SERVICE DESCRIPTION AIM/New-ICQ(TCP:5190)

AOL'Ss Internet Messenger service, used as a listening port by ICQ.

Authentication protocol used by some servers.

A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software.

Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.

Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.

File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.

NetMeeting uses this protocol.

HTTP(TCP:80) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web.

HTTPS(TCP:443) HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.

ICQ(UDP:4000) This is a popular Internet chat program.

The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.

The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service.

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management

Table 64 Commonly Used Services

SERVICE DESCRIPTION IPSEC_TUNNEL(ESP:0)

The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.

This is another popular Internet chat program.

Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this protocol.

Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.

An Internet chat program.

A protocol for news groups.

Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.

Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.

Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.

Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.

Remote Command Service.

REAL_AUDIO(TCP:7070)

A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.

Simple Network Management Program.

Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).

Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.

Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.

Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol).

Another videoconferencing solution.

15.7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities

If you enable bandwidth management but do not configure a rule for critical traffic like VoIP, the voice traffic may then get delayed due to insufficient bandwidth. With the automatic traffic classifier feature activated, the ZyXEL Device automatically assigns a default bandwidth

management class and priority to traffic that does not match any of the user-defined rules. The traffic is classified based on the traffic type. Real-time traffic always gets higher priority over

The following table shows you

the priorities between the three default classes (AutoClass_H,

AutoClass_M and Default Class) and user-defined rules. 6 is the highest priority.

Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes

CLASS TYPE PRIORITY User-defined with high priority

AutoClass_H User-defined with medium priority

AutoClass_M User-defined with low priority

Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General

Figure 104 Bandwidth Management: General

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 66 Bandwidth Management: General

LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Bandwidth Management

Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply bandwidth management. Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule.

Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule.

Enable Automatic Traffic Classifier

This field is only applicable when you select the Enable Bandwidth Management check box.

Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device base on the default bandwidth classes to apply bandwidth management. Real-time packets, such as VolP traffic always get higher priority.

Click Apply to save your customized settings.

Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

15.9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration

Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen.

Figure 105 Bandwidth Management: Advanced

Management Bandwidth

User-defined Service

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 67 Bandwidth Management: Advanced

DESCRIPTION Upstream Bandwidth (kbps)

Enter the amount of bandwidth in kbps (2 to 100,000) that you want to allocate for traffic. 20 kbps to 20,000 kbps is recommended.

The recommendation is to set this speed to be equal to or less than the speed of the broadband device connected to the WAN port. For example, set the speed to 1000 Kbps (or less) if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an upstream speed of 1000 Kbps.

Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre-defined service.

# This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.

Enable Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply this bandwidth management rule.

Service This is the name of the service.

Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low.

Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen where you can modify the rule.

Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications

Service and/or subnets.

# This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.

Enable Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply this bandwidth management rule.

Direction Select To LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the ZyXEL Device

forwards to the LAN.

Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards to the WAN.

Select To WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards to the WLAN.

Enter a descriptive name of up to 19 alphanumeric characters, including spaces.

Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low.

Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 15.9.2 on page 183 for more information.

Click the Remove icon to delete a rule. Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 181

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

15.9.1 Rule Configuration with the Pre-defined Service

To edit a bandwidth management rule for the pre-defined service in the ZyXEL Device, click

the Edit icon in the displays.

Application List table of the Advanced screen. The following screen

Figure 106 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Pre-defined Service

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 68 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: Pre-defined Service

# This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.

Enable Select an interface's check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface.

Direction These read-only labels represent the physical interfaces. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface, regardiess of the traffic's source.

Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the ZyXEL Device and be managed by bandwidth management. Bandwidth Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum

or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second.

This is the port number of the destination. See Table 64 on page 176 for some common services and port numbers.

Source Port This is the port number of the source. See Table 64 on page 176 for some common services and port numbers.

Protocol This is the protocol (TCP or UDP) used for the service.

OK Click OK to save your customized settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

15.9.2 Rule Configuration with the User-defined Service

In addition to the pre-defined services, if you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications and/or subnets, click the Edit icon in the User-defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays.

Figure 107 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service

Destination Part Source Address

Source Subnet Netmask

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 69 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration: User-defined Service

LABEL DESCRIPTION BW Budget Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second.

Destination Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.

Destination Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a

Destination Address. Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting.

Enter the port number of the destination. See Table 64 on page 176 for some common services and port numbers.

Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation.

Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Source

Netmask Address. Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting.

Source Port Enter the port number of the source. See Table 64 on page 176 for some common services and port numbers.

Protocol Select the protocol (TCP or UDP) or select User defined and enter the protocol (service type) number.

OK Click OK to save your customized settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 183

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

15.10 Bandwidth Management Monitor

Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor to open the bandwidth management Monitor screen. View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules. This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule. The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use.

Figure 108 Bandwidth Management: Monitor

This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens.

16.1 Remote Management Overview

Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which ZyXEL Device interface (if any) from which computers.

Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules.

You may manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location via:

+ Internet (WAN only) + ALL (LAN and WAN) + LAN only + Neither (Disable).

Note: When you choose WAN or LAN & WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access.

To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field.

You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows.

16.1.1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:

1 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.

2 The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the ZyXEL Device will disconnect the session immediately.

Chapter 16 Remote Management Screens 185

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

3 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time.

4 There is a firewall rule that blocks it.

16.1.2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

+ Use the ZyXEL Device’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. + Use the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

16.1.3 System Timeout

There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the System screen

1. For UPnP to function normally, the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 70 WWW Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port

You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Chapter 16 Remote Management Screens

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Table 70 WWW Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Client IP |A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the Address ZyXEL Device using this service.

Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

You can use Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device. Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s Telnet settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet. The following screen displays. Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.

Figure 110 Telnet Remote Management

Telnet Server Port F5 Server Access LAN = Secured Client IP Address & al © Selected [0000

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 71 Telnet Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Chapter 16 Remote Management Screens 187

LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Client IP | A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the

Address ZyXEL Device using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the ZyXEL Device’s firmware and configuration files, please see the User’s Guide chapter on firmware and

configuration file FTP client.

maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an

To change your ZyXEL Device’s FTP settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > FTP. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come.

Figure 111 FTP Remote Management

FTP Server Port Pr Server Access LAN x Secured Client IP Address & al © Selected [0000

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 72 FTP Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device

Secured Client IP Address

A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Chapter 16 Remote Management Screens

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Table 72 FTP Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Refer to the chapter on Wizard Setup for background information.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s DNS settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > DNS. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 112 DNS Remote Management

DNS DNS Service Port F Service Access LAN =

Secured Client IP Address & al © Selected 0000

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 73 DNS Remote Management

LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here. Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the

Secured Client IP A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the

Address ZyXEL Device. Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device. Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device.

Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Chapter 16 Remote Management Screens 189

UPNP This chapter introduces the Universal Plug and Play feature.

17.1 Universal Plug and Play Overview

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.

17.1.1 How Do I Know ff l'm Using UPnP?

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.

17.1.2 NAT Traversal

UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

1 Dynamic port mapping

2 Learning public IP addresses

3 Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.

See the chapter on SUA/NAT for further information about NAT.

17.1.3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.

17.2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum Creates UPnPTM Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports IGD 1.0 (Internet Gateway Device). At the time of writing ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4.6 and 4.7 while Windows Messenger 5.0 and Xbox are still being tested.

UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN.

Please see later in this User’s Guide for examples of installing UPnP in Windows XP and Windows Me as well as an example of using UPnP in Windows.

Device Name: ZyXEL P-334U/P-335U Internet Sharing Gateway

T° Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature D allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP FF Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall

TL Note: For UPnP to function normally, the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP.

192 Chapter 17 UPnP P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 74 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal | Select this checkbox to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a Plug and Play (UPnP) | UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering feature the ZyXEL Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).

Allow users to make | Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically

configuration configure the ZyXEL Device so that they can communicate through the ZyXEL changes through Device, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically UPnP reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP

enabled device: this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application.

Allow UPnP to pass | UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN. If you block LAN-to-LAN/ZyXEL through Firewall Device traffic using the firewall, then you need to select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled traffic to pass through the firewall.

This setting remains active until you disable UPnP.

Clear this check box if you do not want to create a hole in the firewall for UPnP application packets (for example, MSN packets).

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

17.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example

This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.

1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-

click Add/Remove Programs.

2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components

selection box. Click Details.

3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the

Components selection box.

4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove

Programs Properties window and click Components: Next 1 æiNameeins 426 à ° [M1 € Phone Dialer 02MB 5 Restart the computer when prompted. 0] Ga Vital Private Netotking OOME Space used by installed components: 424MB Space required O0MB Space available on disk: 866.3 MB Description: Universal Plug and Pay enable seanless connect and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances.

17.4.2 Installing UPnP in Windows XP

[Add/Fremove Programs Properties 1x

Ta add or remave a component, select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded, on part of the component wil be installed. To see what included à component, click Detais

Components: [M1 ÉflAddress Book 17MB 4] Desktop Themes OM |

A Games some 1 @ Muniangusge Support 008 |

Space used by installed components: 424MB Space required O0MB Space available on disk: 866.3 MB Description:

Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers

and online services.

5 of 10 components selected Details.

(Have Dick. œ Cancel 2

To install à companent, select he check box next to the companent name, or clear ie check box i au da not want ta

instal. À shadel bax means that on pat of the component wil be installed. Ta see ha inchaded in à component, cick Detail.

Follow the steps below to install UPnP in Windows XP.

1 Click Start and Control Panel.

2 Double-click Network Connections.

3 Inthe Network Connections

window, click Advanced in the main

menu and select Optional Networking Components Windows Optional Networking

S Network Connections Fle Edt View Favortes Too

; | Operatar-Asssted Dslng O:«- OQ © 5% vuunrreferences..

Network Identification. Bridge Connections

Address |@ Network Connections

SE Components Wizard window displays.

Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details.

In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.

Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next.

Optional Netyarking Comp

Windows Components eu can ado tenorecorconerts af nd.

1 tie ot Fe ar Pr Semi UoMs

17.5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example

This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL device.

Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL device. Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL device.

17.5.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device

Click Start and Control Panel. Double- click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.

Right-click the icon and select Properties.

S Network Connections

Fle Edt View Favotes Tocs Advenced Hep

Change satings of this

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings that were automatically created.

4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.

Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically.

5 Select the Show icon in notification area when connected check box and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray

Z internet Connection

Connect to the Intemet ing:

©] intemet Connection: ]

This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through à shared connection on another computer

Show icon in notification area when connected 6 Double-click the icon to display your current = x x

Internet connection status.

17.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access

With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL device first. This is helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL device.

Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.

196 Chapter 17 UPnP P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections.

3 Select My Network Places under Other Places.

Description of service: [rest

Name or IP address (for example 192.188.0.12) ofthe computer hosting His service on your netwoik:

Extemal Port number for this service:

[143 GT CuDP Intemal Port number for this service: 44 Cane 4 Anicon with the description for = each UPnP-enabled device à) Internet Connection is now connected | * ] displays under Local Network. Cick here for more information.…

5 Right-click the icon for your ZyXEL device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays.

6 Right-click the icon for your ZyXEL device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL device.

17.5.3 Web Configurator Easy Access

2 Internet Connection Statu: [HE] enera | Internet Gateway Status Connected Duraion: 000056 Speed 1000 Mbps Aciviy Internet Intemet Gateway My Computer Packets Sent 8 gts Received 5 746

With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL device first. This is helpful if you do not know the IP address

of the ZyXEL device.

Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.

Fie Ed ou Favories Tocs Adrarced ap

1 Click Start and then Control Panel. RSS 2 Double-click Network Connections.

3 Select My Network Places under FORCES Network Tasks

4 Anicon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network.

Local Area Connection Encblec LA, acceon ENLzorD-1x PCA as

6 Right-click the icon for your ZyXEL

device and select Properties. A properties ==

window displays with basic information EEE

about the ZyXEL device. ss) Manufacture Model Name: Model Number: Description:

This chapter discusses how to configure the print server on the ZyXEL Device.

18.1 Print Server Overview

À print server is a device or software that provides users on a network with shared access to one or more printers. The print server acts as a buffer, holding the information to be printed out in memory until the printer becomes free. Print servers can be programmed to print jobs in the order that they arrive or to give priority to particular users who, in effect, can jump the print queue. The advantages of a print server include efficient use of expensive resources, for example, laser printers. This avoids having to retry to print if the printer is initially busy.

18.2 ZyXEL Device Print Server

The ZyXEL Device has a built-in print server that allows the LAN to share a printer. There is no need to assign a dedicated computer as a print server or have a standalone print server device.

Print requests are sent by each computer to the ZyXEL Device. These request are placed in a queue and are then printed when the printer becomes available.

The print server driver must be set up on each computer in your network that you want to use the print server. Before you set up the print server driver, make sure the USB printer and your computer are connected to the ZyXEL Device and that both the ZyXEL Device, your computer and the USB printer are turned on.

Use Chapter 19 on page 201 to set up your computer to use the ZyXEL Device print server driver.

Chapter 18 Print Server 199

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 75 Configuring Print Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION Print Device Name

Type a Print Device Name (of up to 31 printable characters) for recognition of the associated printer on the print server network.

This name is displayed on a computer on the print server network when a print job is executed.

This displays the model name of the printer currently connected to the ZyXEL Device print server.

This field displays the print server status on the ZyXEL Device.

Ready: The print server has established a TCP/IP connection with a printer, is online and ready to print.

Printing: À computer on the print server network is executed a print job. PaperOut: The printer loading tray has no paper to perform the printing job

Offline: The computers in the print server network cannot use the print server. Make sure a USB v1.1 compliant printer is connected to the ZyXEL Device's USB port and powered on.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Reset to configure the Print Device Name afresh.

This chapter shows you how to set up a print server driver for a Windows or Macintosh computer.

19.1 Installation Requirements

To install the print server driver you will need the following requirements

+ Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X

+ A computer with an Ethernet port + An Ethernet cable and a USB cable

19.2 Windows 95/98 SE/Me/2000/XP/NT 4.0

We use the Windows 2000 screens here as an example. Screens and steps vary slightly for different Windows operating systems.

Note: You must have a printer with a driver and you need to know the IP address of the ZyXEL Device.

1 Insert the CD (supplied with the ZyXEL Device) into the CD-ROM driver on your computer. The CD Autorun screen is displayed.

2 Select Network Print Server Setup.

specified file location and open the setup wizard (by running the PSWizard.exe file in the folder you selected) manually.

After you install the print monitor and open the setup wizard, follow the steps below to install the print server driver on your computer.

202 Chapter 19 Print Server Driver Setup

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

1 The Welcome screen displays. Click Next to continue.

Welcome to the Network Print Server Setup Wizard

Before vau proceed, make sure the print server andhe prier are proper connected and turned on

2 The Select A Print Server screen displays. The wizard automatically detects whether or not a print server is connected to your computer. Make sure that your ZyXEL Device is correctly connected and a compatible USB printer is connected to the ZyXEL Device. Highlight the print server and click Next to continue.

Figure 118 Network Print Server Setup Wizard: Select A Print Server x

‘This Wizard has founcithe following print Servers onthe network. Select a print server that sou wantto setup from ine list

Note : your prit sewerhes justbeentumed on, may take afewr minutes fr he print serertoinitalize before it can be detected and displayed by the mizard

<Bsck EE Chapter 19 Print Server Driver Setup 203

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

3 The Change Settings screen displays. If you want to change your print server”’s IP address, select Yes, I want to change settings, leave the Password field blank and click Next. The print server’s IP address is the ZyXEL Device’s IP address. Since the wizard detects your print server”’s IP address automatically, it’s recommended that you select No, I don’t want to change settings and click Next to use the current print server settings and continue with the wizard.

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

4 Select the USB printer that is connected to the ZyXEL Device if you have added it on your computer already and click Next.

If your printer is not listed, click Add New Printer and see Section 19.2.2 on page 207 for how to add a printer on your computer. After you have added a printer, the Select A Printer screen displays again. Select the printer you have added and click Next to

“The Wizard now helps fou set up he printer hais connected the pri sener. You san eïher select a printer that has area been inetalied on this computer or add a new printer

5 A Summary screen displays. Check your settings and click Next to continue.

Figure 121 Network Print Server Setup Wizard: Summary x]

‘The Ward is aboutto fish the instalation. Following is the summary cfiha eatinge.

6 Click Finish to save and close your Network Print Server Setup Wizard. Your print server driver setup is complete.

Figure 122 Network Print Server Setup Wizard: Installation Complete

Installation Complete 1

‘The Wizard has successtull installed the network print server and the printer on your system.

19.2.2 Adding a New Printer

1 Click Add New Printer in the Network Print Server Setup Wizard: Select A Printer screen (see Figure 120 on page 205). A help dialog box pops up to guide you through the

adding printer process.

Figure 123 Add Printer Help

lelp For A You have chosen to add a new printer. Windows Add Printer Wizard has been brought up to help you add a new printer, Follow the instructions in this Help to add à new printer on this computer. Please note though these steps might vary slightiy, depending on which Windows version is used, the functionality of these procedures is exactly the same. After Windows Add Print Wizard finishes, you must return to Network Print Server Setup Wizard. 1. When Windows Add Printer Wizard starts, click Next.

. Click Local printer, and then dick Next.

. Select LPT1: (Recommended Printer Port), and then click Next.

Follow the instructions on the screen to finish

setting up the printer by selecting the

manufacture and model of your printer and typing

à name for your printer.

5. Do not print a test page to the printer.

Click Finish to complete the Windows Add Printer

7. Now return ta the Network Print Server Setup Wizard and continue setting up print server.

2 The Add Printer Wizard screen then also displays. Click Next.

Figure 124 Add Printer Wizard: Welcome

Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard

3 Select Local printer and click Next.

Figure 125 Add Printer Wizard: Local or Network Printer

Local or Network Printer Is the printer atached to your computer?

4 Select an LPT (Line Printing Terminal) port (a parallel port) as the computer interface for the USB printer.

Figure 126 Add Printer Wizard: Select the Printer Port

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

5 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturers list of printers.

Select the printer model from the list of Printers.

If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers, you can insert the printer driver installation CD/disk or download the driver file to your computer, click Have Disk. and install the new printer driver.

8 Click Next to continue.

Figure 127 Add Printer Wizard: Printer Driver ]

Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer o use.

(# Scect'he manufactures and mad f your pintr. I your pinter came wih an instltion Li disk, cick Have Disk. 1 our printer is not Isted. consul your pnter documentation for à

compatible printer Manulacturrs Pier:

9} EPSON She 043 Series |

(Windows Update | _ Have Disk.

9 Ifthe following screen displays, select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it. Otherwise, select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the previous screen and click Next.

Figure 128 Add Printer Wizard: Use Existing Driver ]

Use Existing Driver A divers akead installed for is printer You can use or replace the existing diver

EPSON Stylus C43 Series

Do you want to keep the existing diver or use the new one? Rp de crane

10 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue.

Figure 129 Add Printer Wizard: Name Your Printer

Name Your Printer ‘You must assign a name for hs printer.

EPSON Stylus C3 Senes

11 The ZyXEL Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server by sharing the printer with other users in the same network; just select Do not share this printer and click Next to proceed to the following screen.

Figure 130 Add Printer Wizard: Printer Sharing

Printer Sharing au can share is prnter with ather netnoik users.

Chapter 19 Print Server Driver Setup

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

12 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page. À pop-up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly. Otherwise select No and then

click Next to continue.

Figure 131 Add Printer Wizard: Print Test Page

Print Test Page To Gonfim that he printer is instaled propety you can print à let page.

Do you want ta pit a test page?

adding a new printer.

Figure 132 Add Printer Wizard Complete

Completing the Add Printer Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard.

To close this wizard, câck Fish.

13 The following screen shows your current printer settings. Select Finish to complete

Use the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer.

1 Click the Print Center ico

located in the Macintosh Dock (a place holding a series

of icons/shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop). Proceed to step 6 to continue. Ifthe Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock, proceed to the next step.

Chapter 19 Print Server Driver Setup

2 On your desktop, double-click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD

Figure 133 Macintosh HD Macintosh HD:

3 Double-click the Applications folder.

4 Double-click the Utilities folder.

Address Book Calculator

6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen.

Stylus C43 | Stopped

7 Setup your printer in the Printer List configuration screen. Select IP Printing from the drop-down list box.

8 Inthe Printer’s Address field, type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device. 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box. 10 Type LP1 (a parallel port) in the Queue Name field.

11 Select your Printer Model from the drop-down list box. If the printer's model is not listed, select Generic.

Figure 138 Printer Configuration ee Printer List

Printers Address: [192.168.1.1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address.

O) use default queue on server

Queue Name: [LP1 } Printer Model: { Generic # =

Chapter 19 Print Server Driver Setup 213

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

12 Click Add to select a printer model, save and close the Printer List configuration

Internet address or DNS name

Complete and valid address.

Printers Address: [19216811

14 Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete. You can now use the ZyXEL Device’s print server to print from a Macintosh computer. Refer to the Chapter 18 on page 199 for information on your ZyXEL Device print server configuration screen.

This chapter provides information on the System screens.

20.1 System Overview

See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens.

20.2 System General Screen

Click Maintenance > System. The following screen displays.

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 76 System General

LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the ZyXEL Device in an Ethernet network. It is recommended you enter your computer's “Computer name” in this field (see the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computer's name).

This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not

allowed, but dashes “-” and underscores "_" are accepted.

Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP.

The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain

name. Administrator Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the Inactivity Timer session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in

with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended).

Password Setup Change your ZyXEL Device’s password (recommended) using the fields as shown. Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the

system in this field.

New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type.

Retype to Confirm | Type the new password again in this field.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.3 Time Setting Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device’s time based on your local time zone.

Current Time and Date

T° Get from Time Server

rime Zone: [OMD creenwien teen tie: Dubin,Ereurgn Lisbon Lomer 2]

Start Date Fist 2] [Seturdey Æf of [ienuary EÂ (2000-01-01) at [0 o'clack End Date Fist 2] Saiudey Æf of [January Ef (2000-01-01) at | o'clock

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date

This field displays the time of your ZyXEL Device.

Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time with the time server.

This field displays the date of your ZyXEL Device.

Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the date with the time server.

Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it.

New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time

(hh:immiss) configured manually.

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply.

LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date (yyyy/mm/dd) configured manually.

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply.

Get from Time Server

Select this radio button to have the ZyXEL Device get the time and date from the time server you specified below.

Select Auto to have the ZyXEL Device automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply.

User Defined Time Server Address

Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.

Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.

Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.

Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field.

Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field.

Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the ZyXEL Device’s logs. Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations.

The web configurator allows you to look at all of the ZyXEL Devices logs in one location.

Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen.

Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see Section 21.2 on page 220). Options include logs about system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or blocked web sites, blocked web features (such as ActiveX controls, Java and cookies), attacks (such as DoS) and IPSec.

Log entries in red indicate system error logs. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries

after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or

Display: [Al Logs =] _EnsïlogNow | _Retresh | _CiearLog

Successful WEB login Time synchronization successful Time initialized by NTP server: ntp3.cs.wisc.edu Time synchronization successful Time initialized by NTP server: ntp3.cs.wisc.edu Time synchronization successful Time initialized by NTP server: timel.stupi.se WAN interface gets 1P:172.23.23,114

Successful WEB login

Waiting content filter server (66.35.255.70) timeouti Waiting content filter server (66.35.255.70) timeoutl

192.168.1.33 User:admin

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

LABEL DESCRIPTION Display The categories that you select in the Log Settings page (see Section 21.2 on page 220) display in the drop-down list box.

Select a category of logs to view; select AII Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page.

Time This field displays the time the log was recorded. See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the ZyXEL Device's time and date.

Message This field states the reason for the log.

Source This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.

Destination This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.

Note This field displays additional information about the log entry.

Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info fields in Log Settings).

Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen.

Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs.

You can configure the ZyXEL Device’s general log settings in one location.

Click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings to open the Log Settings screen.

Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send logs; the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send the logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device to send.

An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies, active X and so on. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.

Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full (see Log Schedule). Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent

Figure 144 Log Settings

FT clear log after sending mail

M active Syslog Server IP Address pooo {Server NAME or IP Address) Log Facility Locat

Active Log and Alert

Send immediate alert System Maintenance M system Errors System Errors TT Access Control Access Control T Blocked Web Sites TCP Reset 1 Blocked Java etc. Packet Filter [n}

ICMP O Remote Management

Attacks Part Isolation

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 79 Log Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION E-mail Log Settings

Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.

Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. Not all ZyXEL Device models have this field.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 79 Log Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Log To

The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via e-mail.

Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a Dos attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E- mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.

Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. lf mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e- mail logs.

Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) (usually the user name of a mail account).

Enter the password associated with the user name above.

This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:

+ WhenLogis Full + _ None.

If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent.

Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs.

Time for Sending Log

Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm) to send the logs.

Clear log after sending mail

Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E- mail of the logs.

The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server.

Click Active to enable syslog logging.

Syslog Server IP Address

Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs.

Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the syslog server manual for more information.

Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record.

Send Immediate Alert

Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E-mail alerts immediately.

Click Apply to save your changes.

Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware, upload or save backup configuration files and restart the ZyXEL Device.

22.1 Firmware Upload Screen

Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a "# bin" extension, e.g., "ZyXEL Device.bin". The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for upgrading firmware using FTP/TFTP commands.

Click Maintenance > Tools. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device.

Figure 145 Maintenance Firmware Upload

Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware, browse to the location of the binary (.BIN) upgrade file and click Upload. Upgrade

files can be downloaded from website, 1f the upgrade file is compressed (.ZIP file), you must first extract the binary (.BIN) file. In some cases, you may need tn reconfigure

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 80 Maintenance Firmware Upload

LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.

Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must

decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

Note: Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Chapter 22 Tools 223

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again.

Figure 146 Upload Warning

Firmware Upload In Process

Please wait for the device to finish restaming(PMR LED is on steadf). This sheuld take about tua minutes. To ancess the device after à successful firmware upload, you need ta Tag in again. Check Your new firmware version in he system status menu

The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

Figure 147 Network Temporarily Disconnected

(6) Local Area Connection Network cable unplugaed

After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.

Ifthe upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen.

Figure 148 Upload Error Message

Firmware upload error!

The uploaded file was not accepted by the device. Please return to the previous page and select à valid upgrade file, Click Help for more information.

22.2 Configuration Screen

See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for transferring configuration files using FTP/TFTP commands.

Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next.

Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer. Eackur

Restore Configuration

‘To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system, browse to the location of the configuration file and click

Back to Factory Defaults

= LAN IP address wil be 192,168.11

22.2.1 Backup Configuration

Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Devices current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.

Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to your computer

22.2.2 Restore Configuration

Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device.

Table 81 Maintenance Restore Configuration

LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.

Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must

decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process.

Note: Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress

After you see a “configuration upload successful” screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the ZyXEL Device again.

Chapter 22 Tools 225

The Device Is Rebooting Now.

afterthe device finishes rebaoting, the login screen displays.

The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

Figure 151 Temporarily Disconnected

(6) Local Area Connection Network cable unplugaed

If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default ZyXEL Device IP address (192.168.1.1). See your Quick Start Guide for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.

Ifthe upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen.

Figure 152 Configuration Restore Error

The configuration file was not accepted by the device, Please return to the previous page and select à valid configuration file. Click Help for more information.

22.2.3 Back to Factory Defaults

Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults.

You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL Device. Refer to the chapter about introducing the web configurator for more information on the RESET button.

System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off.

Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the ZyXEL Device reboot. This does not affect the ZyXEL Device's configuration.

Figure 153 System Restart

Clik Restart to have the device perform a software restart, The SYS(or PWR) LED blinks asthe device restarts and then stays steady on If the restart is successful, Wait a minute before logging inte the device again

Click Maintenance > Config Mode to open the following screen. This screen allows you to hide or display the advanced screens of some feaures or the advanced features, such as MAC filter or static route. Basic is selected by default and you cannot see the advanced screens or

features. If you want to view and configure all screens including the advanced ones, select

Advanced and click Apply.

Figure 154 Config Mode

The following table includes the screens that you can view and configure only when you select

Table 82 Config Mode: Advanced Screens

This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies.

24.1 Problems Starting Up the ZyXEL Device

Table 83 Troubleshooting Starting Up Your ZyXEL Device

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs turn on when | turn on the ZyXEL Device.

Make sure that the ZyXEL Device's power adaptor is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure that the ZyXEL Device and the power source are both turned on.

Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.

If the error persists, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your vendor.

24.2 Problems with the LAN Table 84 Troubleshooting the LAN PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The LAN LEDs do not turn on.

Check your Ethernet cable connections (refer to the Quick Start Guide for details). Check for faulty Ethernet cables.

Make sure your computer's Ethernet Card is working properly.

1 cannot access the ZyXEL Device from the LAN.

If Any IP is disabled, make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the ZyXEL Device and your computer(s) are on the same subnet.

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

24.3 Problems with the WAN Table 85 Troubleshooting the WAN PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The WAN LED is off.

Check the connections between the ZyXEL Device WAN port and the cable/DSL modem or ethernet jack.

Check whether your cable/DSL device requires a crossover or straight-through cable.

1 cannot get a WAN IP address from the ISP.

Click WAN to verify your settings.

The username and password apply to PPPOE and PPPoA encapsulation only. Make sure that you have entered the correct Service Type, User Name and Password (be sure to use the correct casing). Refer to the WAN Setup chapter.

1 cannot access the Internet.

Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on and connected to the network. Verify your WAN settings. Refer to the chapter on WAN setup.

Make sure you entered the correct user name and password.

If you use PPPOE pass through, make sure that bridge mode is turned on.

The Internet connection disconnects.

If you use PPPOE encapsulation, check the idle time-out setting. Refer to the Chapter 6 on page 95.

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION l cannot The usermame is “admin”. The default password is “1234”. The Password and access the Username fields are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password

and username using the proper casing.

If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the password.

l'cannot access the web configurator.

Make sure that there is not a Telnet console session running.

Use the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Refer to the instructions on checking your WAN connection.

Use the ZyXEL Device's LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. Refer to for instructions on checking your LAN connection.

Check that you have enabled web service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computer's IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on remote management for details.

Your computer's and the ZyXEL Device's IP addresses must be on the same subnet for LAN access.

If you changed the ZyXEL Device's LAN IP address, then enter the new one as the URL.

See the following section to check that pop-up windows, JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed.

24.5 Problems with Restricted Web Pages and Keyword

Table 87 Troubleshooting Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Access to a Make sure that the Enable Parental Control check box is selected in the Parental

restricted web |Control screen.

blocked. Make sure that you select a category in the Parental Control screen to restrict access to web pages relevant to that category. For example, select the Gambling check box to prevent access to www.onlinegambling.com.

Access to a Make sure that you select the Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering

web page with | screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List.

Sonsining a If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL,

forbidden customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword

keyword is not Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter.

Table 87 Troubleshooting Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Parental Restart the device to clear the cache.

Control is configured correctly, but | can still access

The content filter server may be unavailable. The View Logs screen can display content filtering log messages. See the Log Descriptions appendix for a list of possible log messages. In the View Logs screen copy and paste the log messages and e-mail them to customer support with an explanation of the problem.

restricted web |1f you still have problems, contact your vendor or customer support for further advice.

Problems with the Password

Table 88 Troubleshooting the Password

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the ZyXEL Device.

The password field is case sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password using the proper casing.

Use the Reset button to restore the factory default configuration file. This will restore all of the factory defaults including the password; see section 2.3 for details.

Problems with Remote Management

Table 89 Troubleshooting Telnet

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the ZyXEL Device from the LAN or WAN.

Refer to Chapter 16 on page 185 for scenarios when remote management may not be possible.

When NAT is enabled: + Use the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. + Use the ZyXEL Device's LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting

Problems with the Print Server

Table 90 Troubleshooting the Print Server

PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot print Verify that the printer uses USB 1.1 or 1.0 by checking your printer's

anything using the specifications.

sp piee the P- Make sure the USB printer is powered on and can work properly.

335. Make sure you install the print server driver on your computer. See Chapter 19

on page 201 for how to set up the print server driver on your computer.

Check the USB cable connections.

24.5.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

+ Web browser pop-up windows from your device. +_JavaScripts (enabled by default). +_ Java permissions (enabled by default).

Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary.

24.5.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.

Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.

24.5.1.1.1 Disable pop-up Blockers

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.

2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.

Figure 156 Internet Options

Settings € Move the slider to select à privacy setting for the Internet

| - Blocks third-party cookies that do not have à compact

- Restrcts first-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without mplicit consent

Pop-up Blocker & Prevent most pop-up windows from appearing.

[1 Block pop-up: tting

3 Click Apply to save this setting.

24.5.1.1.2 Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions

Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.

1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.

2 Select Settings...to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.

Settings & Move the slider to select à privacy setting for the Internet

privacy policy - Blocks third-party cookies that use persanally identifiable IE information without your implicit consent

| - Blocks third-party cookies that do not have a compact

- Resticts frst-party cockies that use personal identifiable information without implci consent

Pop-up Blocker Prevent most pop-up windows from appear

3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.

4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.

Note: If you change the IP address of your device, make sure that the new address matches the address you type in the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 237

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Pop-up Blocker Settings

Pop-ups are currently blocked. You can alow popups from specific Web sites by adding the sie lo the Ist belon.

Notfications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop-up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop-up is blocked.

Medium: Block most automatic pop-ups v Pop-up Blocker FAQ

5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.

6 Click Apply to save this setting. 24.5.1.2 JavaScripts

If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed.

Intemet Localintranet Trusted sites Restiicted sites

Intermet This zone contains all Web sites you havent placed in other zones

r-Securt level for this zone Move the slider to setthe security level fo this zone. = | = Medium - Safe browsing and stil functional “+ - Prompts before dowrloading potential unsafe content - Unsigned ActiveX controls wil not be downloaded - | = -Appropriate for most Intemet sites

(sont. ]) Defaui Level ok Cancel Bppiy

2 Click the Custom Level... button.

3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).

5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window.

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 239

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 160 Security Settings - Java Scripting

Active scripting O Dissble

r Reset custom settings

Reset to: [Medium F Reset

24.5.1.3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.

2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM.

4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.

5 Click OK to close the window.

1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.

2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.

3 Click OK to close the window.

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting

24.5.2 ActiveX Controls in Internet Explorer

If ActiveX is disabled, you will not be able to download ActiveX controls or to use Trend Micro Security Serivces. Make sure that ActiveX controls are allowed in Internet Explorer.

Screen shots for Internet Explorer 6 are shown. Steps may vary depending on your version of Internet Explorer.

1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.

Local intranet Trusted sites Resticted sites

Internet This zone contains all Web sites you havenit placed in other zones

Security level for this zone

Custom settings. - To change the settings, click Custom Level. - To use the recommended settings, click Default Level.

3 Scroll down to ActiveX controls and plug-ins. 4 Under Download signed ActiveX controls select the Prompt radio button.

5 Under Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins make sure the Enable radio button is selected.

6 Then click the OK button.

Settings: Mactivex controls and @] Automatic prompting for ActiveX controls

ÿ] Binary and script behaviors % (@] Download signed ActiveX controls

Reset to: |Medium v] (LReset

Chapter 24 Troubleshooting

The following table is

APPENDIX A Product Specifications

summary of other features available.

USB Port (P-335U only)

One AG switch to allow either IEEE 802.11a or IEEE 802.11b/g compliant wireless devices to communicate with the ZyXEL Device wirelessly.

Operation Temperature

0°C-50°C Operation Humidity

20% — 95% (non-condensing)

Distance between the 138 mm centers of the holes (for

wall mounting) on the

Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device.

Wireless Functionality

Allow the IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11a wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network.

Appendix À Product Specifications

FEATURE DESCRIPTION Firmware Upgrade

Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator, an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the ZyXEL Device.

Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!

Configuration Backup & Restoration

Make a copy of the ZyXEL Device's configuration. You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration.

Network Address Translation (NAT)

Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert your public IP address(es) to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network.

If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network.

With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.

IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The ZyXEL Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).

IP Alias IP alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks

over the same Ethernet interface with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each subnet.

Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs.

Use packet tracing and logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to an external syslog server.

PPPOE PPP0E mimics a dial-up Internet access connection.

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The ZyXEL Device supports one PPTP connection at a time.

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)

A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network.

Activate UPnP to have the ZyXEL Device communicate with other UPnP- enabled devices in a network.

RoadRunner Support The ZyXEL Device supports Time Warner's RoadRunner Service in addition to standard cable modem services. Firewall You can configure firewall on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet

access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example.

The ZyXEL Device blocks access to web sites with URLS that contain keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled.

FEATURE DESCRIPTION IPSec VPN (P-335Ù only)

Establish a Virtual Private Network (VPN) to connect with business partners and branch offices using data encryption and the Internet to provide secure communications without the expense of leased site-to- site lines. The ZyXEL Device VPN is based on the IPSec standard and is fully interoperable with other IPSec-based VPN products.

Print Server (P-335U only)

The ZyXEL Device has a built-in print server that allows computers on the LAN to share a USB printer. This eliminates the need to assign a dedicated computer as a print server or have a standalone print server device.

Bandwidth Management

You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers.

This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the ZyXEL Device.

This appendix provides details on the print server interface and system requirements.

Table 93 Print Server Interface

PRINT SERVER INTERFACE USB USB 1.1 (full speed) - compliant port, 1.5Mbps (low speed) and 12Mbps (full speed) data transmission rates.

This port automatically detects the make and model of the USB printer connected to this port.

Table 94 Print Server Requirements and Specifications

PRINT SERVER REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS Network Operating System Support

DHCP (client) Support

a. Only a printer with a USB connection can be used with the ZyXEL Device.

The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the ZyXEL Device print server.

EPSON EPL-6100 Laser Disable bi-directional support on printer.

EPSON TM-T88lI1 Thermo

HP DeskJet 1125C Inkjet Change data type to EMF and disable bi-directional support on printer.

HP DeskJet 1220C Inkjet Change data type to EMF and disable bi-directional support on printer.

IHP DeskJet 3650 Inkjet

HP DeskJet 930C Inkjet

HP LaserJet 1200 Laser Disable bi-directional support on printer. HP LaserJet 1220 Laser Disable bi-directional support on printer. HP LaserJet 1300 Laser

HP LaserJet 2200 Laser Disable bi-directional support on printer. HP LaserJet 2200D Laser Disable bi-directional support on printer. HP LaserJet 3330 Laser

HP LaserJet 5000 Color Laser Requires PCL5 or PCL printer driver. HP LaserJet 5000LE Color Laser Requires PCL5 or PCL printer driver. HP Photosmart 7150 Inkjet

PS: For MFP, the print server supports the printing function only.

APPENDIX C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address

All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.

Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/ IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.

TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems.

After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to "communicate" with your network.

If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that

your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN port.

Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 255

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Client for Microsoft Networks F Installing Components

The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.

If you need the adapter:

1 Inthe Network window, click Add. 2 Select Adapter and then click Add.

3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:

1 Inthe Network window, click Add. 2 Select Protocol and then click Add. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.

4 Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:

1 Click Add. 2 Select Client and then click Add.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.

4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK.

5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.

Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab. + If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. + If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.

Figure 166 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address ax

An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer. If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses, ask your network administretor for an address, and then type it in the space below.

F Detect connection to netwark media

3 Click the DNS Configuration tab.

+ If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.

+ If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in).

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 257

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 167 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration ax

[0 Enable DNS Host Dons

DNS Server Search Order

4 Click the Gateway tab.

+ If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.

+ If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add.

5 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. 6 Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.

7 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer when prompted.

Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run.

2 In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window.

3 Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.

Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.

1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.

258 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT).

Address [De control Panel

Gr Switch to Category view

3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 259

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

LAN or High-Speed Internet Network Tasks

FE create a new connection

À Repair this connection

Bridge Connections Œ Rename this connection

Change settings of this connection

4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab Properties.

Figure 171 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties

General | Authentication | Advanced

## Accton EN1207D-TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter

This connection uses the following items:

M (S] Ciient for Microsoft Networks M JE File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks ÿ

Transmission Control Protocol/Intemet Protocol. The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks.

[1 Show icon in notification area when connected

5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows

+ If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address

in Win XP) and then click

260 Appendix C Setting up

Your Computers IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

+ If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.

General | Altemate Configuration

You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capabilty. Dtherwise, you need ta ask your network administrator far the appropriate IP settings.

6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK.

Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

+ __Inthe IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.

+ In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add.

+ Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.

+ Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways.

+ In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metrie check box and type a metric in Metric.

+ Click Add. + Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.

+ Click OK when finished.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 261

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 173 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties

Advanced TCP/IP Settings HE

| IP Settings |DNS | WINS | Options IP addresses

| IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled

7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):

+ Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es).

+ If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.

If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them.

262 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

General | Altemate Configuration

You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capabilty. Dtherwise, you need ta ask your network administrator far the appropriate IP settings.

8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

9 Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.

10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT).

11Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings 1 Click Start, AIL Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.

2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab.

1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 263

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

ADSL Control and Status

2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.

“vil be supplied by server >

S wi be supplied by server 7 <wil be supplied by server >

< will be supplied by server >

3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

+ __Fromthe Configure box, select Manually. + Type your IP address in the IP Address box. + Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.

+ Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box.

5 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. 6 Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.

7 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).

Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.

1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window.

2 Click Network in the icon bar.

+ Select Automatic from the Location list. + Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. + Clickthe TCP/IP tab.

3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 265

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

IP Address: 192.168.11.12 168.95:11 (Provided by DHCP Server)

Router: 192.168.10.11 Search Domains {Optional)

DHCP Client ID: {Optional)

Example: apple.com, earthlink.net Ethernet Address: 00:05:02:43:93:ff

{@ cick the lock to prevent further changes. Appiy Now

4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

+ __Fromthe Configure box, select Manually. + Type your IP address in the IP Address box. + Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.

+ Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box.

5 Click Apply Now and close the window.

6 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.

This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version.

266 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)

Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.

1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network.

Figure 179 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices

Ranetwork configuration 0x Fle Profile Help

{g{G) You may configure netwoïk devices associated with El (CE) physical hardare here. Multiple logica devices can be ©) associated with a single piece of hardware.

Proflle|Status Device |Mickname [Type

2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown.

Figure 180 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General [M Ethernet Device General | Route | Hardware Device

Activate device when computer starts.

[] Allow all users to enable and disable the device

Automatically obtain DNS information from provider

O Statically set IP addresses:

Manual IP Address S Address: ]

Default Gateway Address:

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 267

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

+ __If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. + If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and

fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.

3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.

4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.

Figure 181 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS Ranenvork configuration AGE Fle Profile Help

New Edit Copy Delete

Devices |Hardware| DNS | Hosts

You may configure the systems hostname, domain, name servers, and search domain. Name servers are used 10 look up other hosts on the network.

] Secondary DNS: ] Tertiary DNS ]

[Active Profile: Common (modified) =

5 Click the Devices tab.

6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens.

Figure 182 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate

(2 redhat-config-network:

You have made some changes in your configuration. To activate the nenwork device eth0, the changes have to be saved.

Do you want to continue?

7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen.

Using Configuration Files

Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address.

268 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig- eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor.

+__ If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example.

Figure 183 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-ethO DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT-yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes

+ If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

Figure 184 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0

DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT-yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE-Ethernet

2 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified.

Figure 185 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf

nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2

3 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network restart inthe /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example.

Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 269

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

RRRXX Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.

Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000 [root@localhost]#

270 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

APPENDIX D IP Subnetting

Routers “route” based on the network number. The router that delivers the data packet to the

correct destination host uses the host ID.

An IP address is made up of four octets (eight bits), written in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1. IP addresses are categorized into different classes. The class of an address depends on the value of its first octet.

+ Class “A” addresses have a 0 in the left most bit. In a class “A” address the first octet is

the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID.

+ _ Class “B” addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit. In a class “B” address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID.

+_ Class “C” addresses begin (starting from the left) with 1 1 0. In a class “C” address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID.

+_ Class “D” addresses begin with 1 1 1 0. Class “D” addresses are used for multicasting. (There is also a class “E” address. It is reserved for future use.)

Table 96 Classes of IP Addresses

OCTET2 OCTET 3 OCTET 4

A class “C” network (8 host bits) can have 2° 2 or 254 hosts.

A class “B” address (16 host bits) can have 2/6 -2 or 65534 hosts.

A class “A” address (24 host bits) can have 224 -2 hosts (approximately 16 million hosts).

Appendix D IP Subnetting

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Since the first octet of a class “A” IP address must contain a “0”, the first octet of a class “A” address can have a value of 0 to 127.

Similarly the first octet of a class “B” must begin with “10”, therefore the first octet of a class “B” address has a valid range of 128 to 191. The first octet of a class “C” address begins with

“110”, and therefore has a range of 192 to 223.

Table 97 Allowed IP Address Range By Class

ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET (BINARY) (DECIMAL)

Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191

Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223

Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239

À subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). À subnet mask has 32 is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID.

Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are. The “natural” masks for class A, B and C IP addresses are as follows.

Table 98 “Natural” Masks

NATURAL MASK A 255.0.0.0 B 255.255.0.0

With subnetting, the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored. For example, a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID. With subnetting, some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits. By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the left most bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.

Appendix D IP Subnetting

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the

number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.

For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128.

The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class “C” address using both notations.

Table 99 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation

SUBNET MASK “1” BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 255.255.255.0 124 0000 0000 255.255.255.128 125 1000 0000 255.255.255.192 126 1100 0000 255.255.255.224 127 1110 0000 255.255.255.240 128 1111 0000 255.255.255.248 129 1111 1000 255.255.255.252 130 1111 1100

The first mask shown is the class “C” natural mask. Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used.

Example: Two Subnets

As an example, you have a class “C” address 192.168.1.0 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

Table 100 Two Subnets Example

NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192.168.1. 0 IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000 Subnet Mask 255.255.255. 0 Subnet Mask (Binary) 11411111.11111111.11111111. 00000000

The first three octets of the address make up the network number (class “C”). You want to have two separate networks.

Divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit. The “borrowed” host ID bit can be either “0” or “1” thus giving two subnets; 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 and 192.168.1.128 with mask 255.255.255.128.

Appendix D IP Subnetting 273

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Note: In the following charts, shaded/bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits “borrowed” to form network ID bits. The number of “borrowed” host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have. The remaining number of host ID bits (after “borrowing”) determines the number of hosts you can have

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.255

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

The remaining 7 bits determine the number of hosts each subnet can have. Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet, so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 27-2 or 126 hosts for each subnet.

192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the subnet itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192.168.1.129 to

Appendix D IP Subnetting

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Example: Four Subnets

The above example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a class “C” address space

into two subnets. Similarly to divide a class

“C” address into four subnets, you need to

“borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00, 01, 10 and 11. The subnet mask is 26 bits (11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26-2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (all 0’s is the subnet itself, all L’s is the broadcast address on the subnet).

Subnet Address: 192.168.1.64

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127

Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.191

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190

Appendix D IP Subnetting

The following table shows class C IP addres:

st octet values for each subnet.

SUBNET ADDRESS | FIRST ADDRESS | LAST ADDRESS Rem ’ 0 1 30 31 3 3 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 85 3 6 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255

Table 108 Class C Subnet Planning

The following table is a summary for class “C” subnet planning.

SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS ORSTS RER

Appendix D IP Subnetting

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks.

For class “A” and class “B” addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of

the network number and which are part of the host ID.

A class “B” address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class “A” address has

three host ID octets (see Table 96 on page 271) available for subnetting.

The following table is a summary for class “B” subnet planning.

Table 109 Class B Subnet Planning

SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS NNSTS RER 1 255.255.128.0 (/17) 2 32766 2 255.255.192.0 (/18) 4 16382 3 255.255.224.0 (/19) 8 8190 4 255.255.240.0 (/20) 16 4094 5 255.255.248.0 (/21) 32 2046 6 255.255.252.0 (/22) 64 1022 7 255.255.254.0 (/23) 128 510 8 255.255.255.0 (/24) 256 254 9 255.255.255.128 (/25) 512 126 10 255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024 62 11 255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048 30 12 255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096 14 13 255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192 14 255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384 15 255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768 1

Appendix D IP Subnetting

This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.

Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration

BSS The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN.

Figure 188 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network

À Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).

Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.

Appendix E Wireless LANS 279

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 189 Basic Service Set

ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).

This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood.

An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.

280 Appendix E Wireless LANs

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Figure 190 Infrastructure WLAN Channel

À channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.1 1a/b/g wireless devices. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance.

Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.

RTS/CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other.

Appendix E Wireless LANS 281

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 191 RTS/CTS CTS Range

Station AP Station B When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.

RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked.

When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.

Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.

You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.

Ifthe RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.

Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.

Fragmentation Threshold

À Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames.

282 Appendix E Wireless LANs

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

À large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.

Ifthe Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.

Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and Long refer to the length of the syncronization field in a packet.

Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11b/g compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble.

Select Long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.

Select Short preamble if you are sure the wireless adapters support it, and to provide more efficient communications.

Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when wireless adapters support it, otherwise the AP uses long preamble.

Note: The AP and the wireless adapters MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.

IÉÉE 802.119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 110 IEEE 802.119

DATA RATE (MBPS) | MODULATION

1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) 2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) 5.5/11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)

6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54 | OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)

Appendix E Wireless LANS 283

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Wireless Security Overview

Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network.

Wireless security methods available on the Prestige are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Prestige identity.

The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Prestige.

Table 111 Wireless Security Levels

Security Level | Security Type

Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled

IÈEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) Most Secure WPA2

Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Prestige and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it.

In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages

+ User based identification that allows for roaming.

+_ Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.

+ Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients.

RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

284 Appendix E Wireless LANs

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

+ Authentication Determines the identity of the users. + Authorization

Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network.

+ Accounting Keeps track of the client’s network activity.

RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server.

Types of RADIUS Messages

The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication: + Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. + Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. + Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. + Access-Challenge

Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access- Request message.

The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting: + Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. + Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In

addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.

Appendix E Wireless LANS 285

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Types of Authentication

This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MDS5, EAP-TLS, EAP- TTLS, PEAP and LEAP.

The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP. Consult your network administrator for more information.

EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)

MDS authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves” that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text.

However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MDS authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MDS authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.

EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)

With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead.

EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)

EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.

PEAP (Protected EAP)

Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MDS5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco.

Appendix E Wireless LANs

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.

Dynamic WEP Key Exchange

The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. À new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed.

If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled.

Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange

For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types.

Table 112 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types

EAP-TLS |EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate — Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate — Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA.

Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication.

Appendix E Wireless LANS 287

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN.

Ifthe AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.

Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.

Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption than TKIP.

TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism.

WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice..

The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically.

The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.

By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.

The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP)

WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices.

Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again.

Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.

Wireless Client WPA Supplicants

À wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.

The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built- in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.

WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example

You need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.

1 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.

2 The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly.

3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.

Appendix E Wireless LANS 289

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 192 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example

WPA(2)-PSK Application Example

A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.

1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols).

2 The AP checks each wireless client's password and (only) allows it to join the network if the password matches.

3 The AP and wireless clients use the pre-shared key to generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key).

4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them.

Figure 193 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication

able to see what other security parameters you should configure for each

Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features.

Table 113 Wireless Security Relational Matrix

Table 114 System Maintenance Logs

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Time calibration is successful

The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server.

Time calibration failed

The router failed to get information from the time server.

WAN interface gets IP:%s

A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP, PPP0E, PPTP or dial-up server.

DHCP client IP expired

A DHCP clients IP address has expired.

DHCP server assignsès

The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.

Successful WEB login

Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface.

Successful TELNET login

Someone has logged on to the router via telnet.

Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet.

Successful FTP login

Someone has logged on to the router via ftp.

Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp.

NAT Session Table is Full!

The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full.

Starting Connectivity Monitor

Starting Connectivity Monitor.

Time initialized by Daytime Server

The router got the time and date from the Daytime server.

Time initialized by Time server

The router got the time and date from the time server.

Time initialized by NTP server

The router got the time and date from the NTP server.

The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server.

Connect to Time server fail

The router was not able to connect to the Time server.

Connect to NTP server fail

The router was not able to connect to the NTP server.

Too large ICMP packet has been dropped

The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large.

Configuration Change: PC =

Ox®x, Task ID = 0x3x

The router is saving configuration changes.

Successful SSH login

Someone has logged on to the router's SSH server.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's SSH server.

Table 114 System Maintenance Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Successful HTTPS login

Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol.

%s exceeds the max. number of session per

This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per

host! host. setNetBIOSFilter: calloc |The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings. error

readNetBlOSFilter: calloc error

The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.

WAN connection is down.

A WAN connection is down. You cannot access the network through this interface.

Table 116 Access Control Logs

(denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.

Triangle route packet forwarded:

The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.

[TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]

acket without a NAT table entry blocked: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]

The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry.

Router sent blocked web site

message: TCP The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested.

Table 117 TCP Reset Logs

DESCRIPTION Under SYN flood attack,

sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.)

incomplete, sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold. (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) Note: Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen.

Peer TCP state out of

order, sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order.Note: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state.

Firewall session time

out, sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out.

The default timeout values are as follows:

ICMP idle timeout: 3 minutes

TCP FIN-wait timeout: 2 MSL (Maximum Segment Lifetime set in the TCP header).

TCP idle (established) timeout (s): 150 minutes TCP reset timeout: 10 seconds

Exceed MAX incomplete,

sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user- configured threshold. (Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall. )Note: When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP) > “Maximum Incomplete High”, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete connections < “Maximum Incomplete Low”.

sent TCP The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall tcprst").

Table 118 Packet Filter Logs

[TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP Generic] packet filter matched (set:td, rule:%d)

Attempted access matched a configured filter rule (denoted by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.

Appendix F Log Descriptions

DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy: ICMP <Packet Direction>, <type:%d>,

ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

<code:%d> Firewall rule [NOT] match: ICMP <Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>,

<type:%d>, <code:%d>

ICMP access matched (or didn't match) a firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

Triangle route packet forwarded:

ICMP The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.

Packet without a NAT table entry

blocked: ICMP The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry.

Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:

The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or

ICMP the ICMP packets are out of order. Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender. Table 120 CDR Logs

board$d line*d channel®d, ,%s CO1 Outgoing Call ch=3x%s

The router received the setup requirements for a call. “call” is the reference (count) number of the call. “dev” is the device type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for PPPOE, 10 is for PPTP). “channel” or “ch” is the call channel ID.For example, "board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0 "Means the router has dialed to the PPPOE server 3 times.

board$d line$%d channel%d, call$%d,%s C02 OutCall Connected$d®s

The PPPOE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected.

board$d line$%d channel%d, call$%d,%s C02 Call Terminated

The PPPOE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected.

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

ppp:LCP Starting |The PPP connection's Link Control Protocol stage has started.

ppp:LCP Opening The PPP connection's Link Control Protocol stage is opening.

ppp:CHAP Opening |The PPP connection's Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening.

ppp:IPCP Starting | The PPP connection's Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting.

ppp:IPCP Opening |The PPP connection's Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening.

Appendix F Log Descriptions

Table 121 PPP Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

The PPP connection's Link Control Protocol stage is closing.

The PPP connection's Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing.

DESCRIPTION UPnP pass through Firewall

UPnP packets can pass through the firewall.

Table 123 Content Filtering Logs

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

%s: Keyword blocking

The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword.

$s: Not in trusted web list

The web site is not in a trusted domain, and the router blocks all traffic except trusted domain sites.

$s: Forbidden Web site

The web site is in the forbidden web site list.

#s: Contains ActiveX The web site contains ActiveX.

$s: Contains Java applet

The web site contains a Java applet.

The web site contains a cookie.

The router detected proxy mode in the packet.

The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list, but it did not return the category type.

The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list, and returned the category type.

The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the local cache, but does not know the category type.

The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local cache, and knows the category type.

%s: Trusted Web site

The web site is in a trusted domain.

When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you didn't select the "Block Matched Web Site” check box, the system forwards the web content.

Waiting content filter server timeout

The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout period.

DNS resolving failed

The ZyXEL Device cannot get the IP address of the external content filtering via DNS query.

Creating socket failed

The ZyXEL Device cannot issue a query because TCP/IP socket creation failed, port:port number.

Appendix F Log Descriptions

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 123 Content Filtering Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Connecting to content filter server fail

The connection to the external content filtering server failed.

License key is invalid |The external content filtering license key is invalid.

Table 124 Attack Logs

The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack.

attack ICMP (type:%d, code : %d)

The firewall detected an ICMP attack. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

land [TCP | UDP | IGMP ESP | GRE | OSPF]

The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack.

The firewall detected an ICMP land attack. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

ip spoofing - WAN [TCP UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE OSPF]

The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port.

ip spoofing - WAN ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)

The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

icmp echo: ICMP (type: code : %d)

The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

syn flood TCP The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack.

ports scan TCP The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack.

teardrop TCP The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack.

teardrop UDP The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack.

teardrop ICMP (type:%d, code : %d)

The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

illegal command TCP The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack.

NetBIOS TCP The firewall detected a TCP NetBlOS attack.

ip spoofing - no routing entry [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]

The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack.

ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP (type:#d, code : %d)

The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack.

vulnerability ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)

The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

traceroute ICMP (type:%d, code : %d)

The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack. For type and code details, see Table 131 on page 305.

DESCRIPTION Discard REPLAY packet

The router received and discarded a packet with an incorrect sequence number.

Inbound packet authentication failed

The router received a packet that has been altered. A third party may have altered or tampered with the packet.

Receive IPSec packet, but no corresponding tunnel exists

The router dropped an inbound packet for which SPI could not find a corresponding phase 2 SA.

Rule <%d> idle time out, disconnect

The router dropped a connection that had outbound traffic and no inbound traffic for a certain time period. You can use the "ipsec timer chk_conn" CI command to set the time period. The default value is 2 minutes.

WAN IP changed to <IP>

The router dropped all connections with the “MyIP” configured as “0.0.0.0” when the WAN IP address changed.

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Active connection allowed

The IKE process for a new connection failed because the limit of simultaneous phase 2 SAs has been reached.

Phase 2 Quick Mode has started.

Verifying Remote ID failed:

The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peer's Local/Remote Addresses don't match.

Verifying Local ID failed:

The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peer's Local/Remote Addresses don't match.

IKE Packet Retransmit

The router retransmitted the last packet sent because there was no response from the peer.

Failed to send IKE Packet

An Ethernet error stopped the router from sending IKE packets.

Too many errors! Deleting SA An SA was deleted because there were too many errors.

Phase 1 IKE SA process done

The phase 1 IKE SA process has been completed.

Duplicate requests with the same cookie

The router received multiple requests from the same peer while still processing the first IKE packet from the peer.

IKE Negotiation is in process

The router has already started negotiating with the peer for the connection, but the IKE process has not finished yet.

Phase 1 or phase 2 parameters don't match. Please check all protocols / settings. Ex. One device being configured for 3DES and the other being configured for DES causes the connection to fail.

Local / remote IPs of incoming request conflict with rule <3d>

The security gateway is set to “0.0.0.0” and the router used the peer's “Local Address” as the router's “Remote Address”. This information conflicted with static rule #d; thus the connection is not allowed.

Appendix F Log Descriptions

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 126 IKE Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Cannot resolve Secure Gateway Addr for rule <%d>

The router couldn't resolve the IP address from the domain name that was used for the secure gateway address.

Peer ID: <peer id> <My remote type> -<My local type>

The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection.

vs. My Remote <My remote> - <My remote>

The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection.

vs. My Local <My local>-<My local>

The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection.

IKE uses ISAKMP to transmit data. Each ISAKMP packet contains many different types of payloads. All of them show in the LOG. Refer to RFC2408 — ISAKMP for a list of all ISAKMP

Recv <Main or Aggressive> Mode request from <IP>

The router received an IKE negotiation request from the peer address specified.

Send <Main or Aggressive> Mode request to <IP>

The router started negotiation with the peer.

Invalid IP <Peer local> / <Peer local>

The peer's “Local IP Address” is invalid.

Remote IP <Remote IP> / <Remote IP> conflicts

Phase 1 ID type mismatch

This router's "Peer ID Type" is different from the peer IPSec router's "Local ID Type".

Phase 1 ID content mismatch

This router's "Peer ID Content" is different from the peer IPSec router's "Local ID Content".

No known phase 1 ID type found

The router could not find a known phase 1 ID in the connection attempt.

ID type mismatch. Local / Peer: <Local ID type/Peer ID type>

The phase 1 ID types do not match.

The phase 1 ID contents do not match.

Configured Peer ID Content: <Configured Peer ID Content>

The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the configured “Peer ID Content" is displayed.

Incoming ID Content: <Incoming Peer ID Content>

The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the incoming packet's ID content is displayed.

Unsupported local ID Type: <5a>

The phase 1 ID type is not supported by the router.

Build Phase 1 ID The router has started to build the phase 1 ID.

The router automatically changed the TCP Maximum Segment Size value after establishing a tunnel.

Rule <%d> input idle time out, disconnect

The tunnel for the listed rule was dropped because there was no inbound traffic within the idle timeout period.

XAUTH succeed! Username:

The router used extended authentication to authenticate the listed username.

Appendix F Log Descriptions

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 126 IKE Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION XAUTH fail! Username: The router was not able to use extended authentication to <Username> authenticate the listed username. Rule[$d] Phase 1 negotiation |The listed rules IKE phase 1 negotiation mode did not match

between the router and the peer.

Rule (%d] Phase 1 encryption algorithm mismatch

The listed rule's IKE phase 1 encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 1 authentication algorithm mismatch

The listed rule's IKE phase 1 authentication algorithm did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [$%d] Phase 1 authentication method

The listed rule's IKE phase 1 authentication method did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 1 key group |The listed rules IKE phase 1 key group did not match mismatch between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 2 protocol The listed rule's IKE phase 2 protocol did not match between mismatch the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 2 encryption |The listed rules IKE phase 2 encryption algorithm did not

match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 2 authentication algorithm mismatch

The listed rule's IKE phase 2 authentication algorithm did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 2 encapsulation mismatch

The listed rule's IKE phase 2 encapsulation did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d]> Phase 2 pfs The listed rule's IKE phase 2 perfect forward secret (pfs)

mismatch setting did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [$d] Phase 1 ID mismatch |The listed rules IKE phase 1 ID did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 1 hash The listed rule's IKE phase 1 hash did not match between the

mismatch router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Phase 1 preshared |The listed rules IKE phase 1 pre-shared key did not match

between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] Tunnel built The listed rule's IPSec tunnel has been built successfully. successfully Rule [%d] Peer's public key |The listed rules IKE phase 1 peer's public key was not found.

Rule [%d] Verify peer's The listed rule's IKE phase 1verification of the peer's signature failed signature failed.

Rule [%d] Sending IKE request |IKE sent an IKE request for the listed rule.

Rule [%d] Receiving IKE IKE received an IKE request for the listed rule. request

Swap rule to rule [%d]

The router changed to using the listed rule.

Rule [%d] Phase 1 key length |The listed rules IKE phase 1 key length (with the AES

mismatch encryption algorithm) did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule [%d] phase 1 mismatch The listed rule’s IKE phase 1 did not match between the router

Table 126 IKE Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Rule [%d] phase 2 mismatch

The listed rule’s IKE phase 2 did not match between the router and the peer.

Rule (%d] Phase 2 key length

The listed rule's IKE phase 2 key lengths (with the AES

mismatch encryption algorithm) did not match between the router and the peer.

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Enrollment successful

The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port.

The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority server's IP address and port.

Failed to resolve <SCEP CA server url>

The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server's address cannot be resolved.

Enrollment successful

The CMP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination field records the certification authority server's IP address and port.

The CMP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority server's IP address and port.

Failed to resolve <CMP CA server url>

The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server's IP address cannot be resolved.

Revd ca cert: <subject name>

The router received a certification authority certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Revd user cert: <subject name>

The router received a user certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Revd CRL <size>: <issuer name>

The router received a CRL (Certificate Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Revd ARL <size>: <issuer name>

The router received an ARL (Authority Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Failed to decode the received ca cert

The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Failed to decode the received user cert

The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Failed to decode the

received CRL The router received a corrupted CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Failed to decode the

received ARL The router received a corrupted ARL (Authority Revocation List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.

Appendix F Log Descriptions

Table 127 PKI Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Revd data <size> too large! allowed:

The router received directory data that was too large (the size is listed) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded.

Cert trusted: <subject name>

The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject name.

Due to <reason codes>, cert not trusted: <subject name>

Due to the reasons listed, the certificate with the listed subject name has not passed the path verification. The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate. Please see

Table 128 on page 303 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes.

Table 128 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes

1 Algorithm mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints. 2 Key usage mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints. 3 Certificate was not valid in the time interval.

5 Certificate is not valid.

6 Certificate signature was not verified correctly.

7 Certificate was revoked by a CRL.

8 Certificate was not added to the cache.

9 Certificate decoding failed.

10 Certificate was not found (anywhere).

11 Certificate chain looped (did not find trusted root).

12 Certificate contains critical extension that was not handled.

13 Certificate issuer was not valid (CA specific information missing). 14 (Not used)

16 CRL is not valid.

17 CRL signature was not verified correctly.

18 CRL was not found (anywhere).

19 CRL was not added to the cache.

20 CRL decoding failed.

21 CRLis not currently valid, but in the future.

22 CRL contains duplicate serial numbers.

23 Time interval is not continuous.

24 Time information not available.

25 Database method failed due to timeout.

Table 128 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes (continued)

26 Database method failed. 27 Path was not verified. 28 Maximum path length reached.

Table 129 802.1X Logs

DESCRIPTION Local User Database accepts user.

A user was authenticated by the local user database.

Local User Database reports user credential error.

A user was not authenticated by the local user database because of an incorrect user password.

Local User Database does not find user's credential.

A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database.

RADIUS accepts user.

A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server.

RADIUS rejects user. Pls check RADIUS Server.

A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server. Please check the RADIUS Server.

Local User Database does not support authentication method.

The local user database only supports the EAP-MD5 method. A user tried to use another authentication method and was not authenticated.

User logout because of session timeout expired.

The router logged out a user whose session expired.

User logout because of user deassociation.

The router logged out a user who ended the session.

User logout because of no authentication response from user.

The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response.

User logout because of idle timeout expired.

The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired.

User logout because of user request.

Local User Database does not support authentication mothed.

A user tried to use an authentication method that the local user database does not support (it only supports EAP- MD5).

No response from RADIUS. Pls check RADIUS Server.

There is no response message from the RADIUS server, please check the RADIUS server.

Use Local User Database to authenticate user.

The local user database is operating as the authentication server.

Use RADIUS to authenticate user.

The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication server.

No Server to authenticate user.

There is no authentication server to authenticate a user.

Local User Database does not find user's credential.

A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database.

DIRECTION DESCRIPTION (L to W) LAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN. (W to L) WAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN. (D to L) DMZ to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the DMZ to the LAN. (D to W) DMZ to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the DMZ to the WAN. (W to D) WAN to DMZ ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the DMZ. (L to D) LAN to DMZ ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the DMZ. (L to L/ZW) LAN to LAN/ ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or ZyXEL Device the ZyXEL Device. (W to W/ZW) WAN to WAN/ ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN ZyXEL Device or the ZyXEL Device. (D to D/ZW) DMZ to DMZ/ ACL set for packets traveling from the DMZ to the DM or ZyXEL Device the ZyXEL Device.

A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't Fragment (DF)

A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network.

Redirect datagrams for the Network

Redirect datagrams for the Host

Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network

Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host

Table 131 ICMP Notes (continued)

TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION

0 Time to live exceeded in transit

<Facility*8 + Severity>Mon dd hr:mm:ss hostname <srelP:srePort>" <dstIP:dstPort>" msg="<msg>" note="<note>" devID="<m numbers>"

address last three t="<category>

"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as the system name if you haven't configured one) when the router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is the log's syslog class. The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix. The “deviD” is the last three characters of the MAC address of the router's LAN port. The “cat” is the same as the category in the router's logs.

The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type.

Table 133 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types

LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE SA Security Association PROP Proposal

Table 133 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types (continued)

VID Vendor ID Log Commands

Go to the command interpreter interface.

Configuring What You Want the ZyXEL Device to Log

1 Use the sys logs load command to load the log setting buffer that allows you to configure which logs the ZyXEL Device is to record.

2 Use sys logs category to view a list of the log categories.

Figure 194 Displaying Log Categories Example

ip ipsec bridge bm certificates cenm 8021x radius ras>

3 Use sys logs category followed by a log category to display the parameters that are available for the category.

Figure 195 Displaying Log Parameters Example

ras> sys logs category access Usage: [0:none/1:log/2:alert/3:both] [0:don't show debug type/ l:show debug type]

4 Use sys logs category followed by a log category and a parameter to decide what to record.

Appendix F Log Descriptions 307

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Use 0 to not record logs for that category, 1 to record only logs for that category, 2 to record only alerts for that category, and 3 to record both logs and alerts for that category. Not every parameter is available with every category.

5 Step 5.Use the sys logs save command to store the settings in the ZyXEL Device (you

must do this in order to record logs).

+ Use the sys logs display command to show all of the logs in the ZyXEL Devices log. + Use the sys logs category display command to show the log settings for all of the log

+ Use the sys logs display [log category] command to show the logs in an individual

ZyXEL Device log category.

+ Use the sys logs clear command to erase all of the ZyXEL Device’s logs.

This example shows how to set the ZyXEL Device to record the access logs and alerts and

then view the results.

ras> sys logs load ras> sys logs category access 3 ras> sys logs save ras> sys logs display access #.time source message 0106/08/2004 05:58:21 1172.21.4.154 BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW 1106/08/2004 05:58:20 1172.21.3.56 BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW 2106/08/2004 05:58:20 1172.21.0.2 BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW 3106/08/2004 05:58:20 1172.21.3.191 BLOCK Firewall default policy: IGMP (W to W/ZW

The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port

+ Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like.

+ Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.

+ Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.

Ifthe Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port

Ifthe Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.

+ Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used.

Table 134 Examples of Services

NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) | DESCRIPTION AH User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) tunneling protocol uses this service.

AIM TCP 5190 AOL's Internet Messenger service.

AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers.

BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.

CU-SEEME TCP/UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from

TCP/UDP 24032 | White Pines Software.

DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.

ESP User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.

FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.

FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program, a program to enable

TCP 21 fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.

Table 134 Examples of Services (continued)

NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) | DESCRIPTION HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/ server protocol for the world wide web.

HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.

ICMP User-Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes.

ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.

IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.

IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.

IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail.

IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL.

IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program.

MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this protocol.

NetBlOS TCP/UDP 137 The Network Basic Input/Output System is

TCP/UDP 138 used for communication between TCP/UDP 139 computers in a LAN. TCP/UDP 445

NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.

NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.

NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/ server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.

NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.

PING User-Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.

POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).

POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL.

PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.

PPTP_TUNNEL User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)

enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 134 Examples of Services (continued)

NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) | DESCRIPTION RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.

REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.

REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.

ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems.

RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.

RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet.

SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers.

SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.

SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL.

SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.

SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).

SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.

SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.

SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.

TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System).

TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/ IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Table 134 Examples of Services (continued)

NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) | DESCRIPTION TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol).

VDOLIVE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port

UDP user- number is specified in the application. defined

P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

APPENDIX H Internal SPTGEN This appendix introduces Internal SPTGEN. All menus shown in this appendix are example menus meant to show SPTGEN usage. Actual menus for your product may differ.

Internal SPTGEN Overview

Internal SPTGEN (System Parameter Table Generator) is a configuration text file useful for efficient configuration of multiple Prestiges. Internal SPTGEN lets you configure, save and upload multiple menus at the same time using just one configuration text file — eliminating the need to navigate and configure individual screens for each Prestige. You can use FTP to get the Internal SPTGEN file. Then edit the file in a text editor and use FTP to upload it again to the same device or another one. See the following sections for details.

The Configuration Text File Format

All Internal SPTGEN text files conform to the following format:

<field identification number = field name = parameter values allowed = input>,

where <input> is your input conforming to <parameter values allowed>. The figure shown next is an example of an Internal SPTGEN text file.

Figure 196 Configuration Text File Format: Column Descriptions

/ Menu 1 General Setup

10000000 = Configured <0 (No) | 1(Yes)> = 1

10000001 = System Name <Str> = Your Device 10000002 = Location <Str> =

10000003 = Contact Person’s Name <Str> =

10000004 = Route IP <0 (No) | 1(Yes)> = 1

10000005 = Route IPX <0 (No) | 1(Yes)> = 0

10000006 = Bridge <0 (No) | 1(Yes)> = 0

Note: DO NOT alter or delete any field except parameters in the Input column.

This appendix introduces Internal SPTGEN. All menus shown in this appendix are example menus meant to show SPTGEN usage. Actual menus for your product may differ.

Appendix H Internal SPTGEN 313

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Internal SPTGEN File Modification - Important Points to Remember

Each parameter you enter must be preceded by one “=”sign and one space. Some parameters are dependent on others. For example, if you disable the Configured field in menu 1 (see Figure 196 on page 313), then you disable every field in this menu.

If you enter a parameter that is invalid in the Input column, the Prestige will not save the configuration and the command line will display the Field Identification Number. Figure 197 on page 314, shown next, is an example of what the Prestige displays if you enter a value other than “0” or “1” in the Input column of Field Identification Number 1000000 (refer to Figure 196 on page 313).

Figure 197 Invalid Parameter Entered: Command Line Example

field value is not legal error:-1 ROM-t is not saved, error Line 1D:10000000 reboot to get the original configuration Bootbase Version: V2.02 | 2/22/2001 13:33:11 RAM: Size = 8192 Kbytes

The Prestige will display the following if you enter parameter(s) that are valid.

Figure 198 Valid Parameter Entered: Command Line Example

Please wait for the system to write SPT text file(ROM-t)... Bootbase Version: V2.02 | 2/22/2001 13:33:11

Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example

1 Launch your FTP application. 2 Enter "bin". The command “bin” sets the transfer mode to binary.

3 Get"rom-t" file. The command “get” transfers files from the Prestige to your computer. The name “rom-t” is the configuration filename on the Prestige.

4 Edit the "rom-t" file using a text editor (do not use a word processor). You must leave this FTP screen to edit.

(edit the rom-t text file by a text editor and save it)

Note: You can rename your “rom-t” file when you save it to your computer but it must be named “rom-t” when you upload it to your Prestige.

Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example

1 Launch your FTP application. 2 Enter "bin". The command “bin” sets the transfer mode to binary.

3 Upload your “rom-t” file from your computer to the Prestige using the “put” command. computer to the Prestige.

4 Exit this FTP application.

Figure 200 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example

Example Internal SPTGEN Menus

This section provides example Internal SPTGEN menus.

Table 135 Abbreviations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table

PVA Parameter Values Allowed

INPUT An example of what you may enter

Applies to the Prestige.

Table 136 Menu 1 General Setup

/ Menu 1 General Setup

FIN EN PVA INPUT 10000000 = Configured <0(No) | 1(Yes)> = 0

10000001 = System Name <Str> = Your Device 10000002 = Location <Str> =

10000003 = Contact Person's Name <Str> =

10000004 = Route IP <0(No) | 1(Yes)> = 1

10000006 = Bridge <0(No) | 1(Yes)> = 0

2(Relay)> 30200002 = Client IP Pool Starting Address =

192.168.1.33 30200003 = Size of Client IP Pool = 32 30200004 = Primary DNS Server = 0.0.0.0 30200005 = Secondary DNS Server = 0.0.0.0 30200006 = Remote DHCP Server = 0.0.0.0 30200008 = IP Address = 172.21.2.200

30200009 = IP Subnet Mask = 16 30200010 = RIP Direction <0 (None) | = 0

Only)> 30200011 = Version <0(Rip-1) | = 0

1(Yes)> 30201002 = IP Address = 0.0.0.0 30201003 = IP Subnet Mask = 0 30201004 = RIP Direction <0 (None) | = 0

Appendix H Internal SPTGEN

Appendix H Internal SPTGEN P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

FIN FN PVA INPUT 30500001 = ESSID Wireless 30500002 = Hide ESSID <0(No) | = 0 1(Yes)> 30500003 = Channel ID <1121314151617 |= 1 I8191101111121 13> 30500004 = RTS Threshold <0 - 2432> = 2432 30500005 = FRAG. Threshold <256 - 2432> |- 2432 30500006 = WEP <0(DISABLE) | |= 0 1(64-bit WEP) | 2(128-bit WEP) > 30500007 = Default Key <1121314>|= 0 30500008 = MEP Keyl = 30500009 = MEP Key2 = 30500010 = MEP Key3 = 30500011 = MEP Key4 = 30500012 = Wlan Active <0(Disable) | |= 0 1(Enable)> 30500013 = Wlan 4X Mode <0(Disable) | |= 0 1(Enable)> */ MENU 3.5.1 WLAN MAC ADDRESS FILTER FIN FN PVA INPUT 30501001 = Mac Filter Active <0(No) | = 0 1(Yes)> 30501002 = Filter Action <0(Allow) | = 0 1(Deny)> 30501003 = Address 1 = 00:00:00:00:0 0:00 30501004 = Address 2 = 00:00:00:00:0 0:00 30501005 = Address 3 = 00:00:00:00:0 0:00 Continued 30501034 = Address 32 =

Appendix H Internal SPTGEN

FIN FN PVA INPUT 40000000 = Configured <0(No) | = 1 1(Yes)> 40000001 = ISP <0(No) | = 1 1(Yes)> 40000002 = Active <0(No) | = 1 1(Yes)> 40000003 = ISP's Name = ChangeMe 40000004 = Encapsulation <2(PPPOE) | = 2 3(RFC 1483) | 4(PPPoA )| 5 (ENET ENCAP)> 40000005 = Multiplexing <1(LLC-based) [= 1 | 2(VC-based) 40000006 = VEI # = 0 40000007 = VCI # = 35 40000008 = Service Name <str> = any 40000009 = My Login <Str> = test@pqa 40000010 = My Password <str> = 1234 40000011 = Single User Account <0(No) | = 1 1(Yes)> 40000012 = IP Address Assignment <0(Static) 11(D|= 1 ynamic)> 40000013 = IP Address = 0.0.0.0 40000014 = Remote IP address = 0.0.0.0 40000015 = Remote IP subnet mask = 0 40000016 = ISP incoming protocol filter set 1 = 6 40000017 = ISP incoming protocol filter set 2 = 256 40000018 = ISP incoming protocol filter set 3 = 256 40000019 = ISP incoming protocol filter set 4 = 256 40000020 = ISP outgoing protocol filter set 1 = 256 40000021 = ISP outgoing protocol filter set 2 = 256 40000022 = ISP outgoing protocol filter set 3 = 256 40000023 = ISP outgoing protocol filter set 4 = 256 40000024 = ISP PPPOE idle timeout = 0 40000025 = Route IP <0(No) | = 1 1(Yes)> 40000026 = Bridge <0(No) | = 0 1(Yes)>

320 Appendix H Internal SPTGEN P-334U/P-335U Users Guide

Table 138 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup (continued)

40000027 = ATM QoS Type <O(CBR) | (1 = 1 (UBR) >

40000028 = Peak Cell Rate (PCR) = 0

40000029 = Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) = 0

40000030 = Maximum Burst Size (MBS) = 0

40000031= RIP Direction <0 (None) | = 0 1(Both) | 2(In Only) | 3(Out Only)>

40000032= RIP Version <0(Rip-1) | = 0 1(Rip-28) 12 (Rip-2M) >

40000033= Nailed-up Connection <0 (No) = 0 I1(Yes)>

/ Menu 12.1.1 IP Static Route Setup

FIN EN PVA INPUT 120101001 = IP Static Route set #1, Name <Str> = 120101002 = IP Static Route set #1, Active <0(No) |1(Yes)> = 0 120101003 = IP Static Route set #1, Destination = 0.0.0.0 IP address 120101004 = IP Static Route set #1, Destination = 0 IP subnetmask 120101005 = IP Static Route set #1, Gateway = 0.0.0.0 120101006 = IP Static Route set #1, Metric = 0 120101007 = IP Static Route set #1, Private <0(No) |1(Yes)> = 0

/ Menu 12.1.2 IP Static Route Setup

FIN EN PVA INPUT 120108001 = IP Static Route set #8, Name <Str> = 120108002 = IP Static Route set #8, Active <0(No) |1(Yes)> = 0 120108003 = IP Static Route set #8, Destination = 0.0.0.0 IP address 120108004 = IP Static Route set #8, Destination = 0 IP subnetmask 120108005 = IP Static Route set #8, Gateway = 0.0.0.0 120108006 = IP Static Route set #8, Metric = 0 120108007 = IP Static Route set #8, Private <0(No) |1(Yes)> = 0

greater) > 210101013 = |IP Filter Set l,Rule 1 Act Match <1 (check = 3

next) |2 (forward) |

3(drop) > 210101014 = |IP Filter Set l,Rule 1 Act Not Match |<l(check = 1

next) |2 (forward) |

Appendix H Internal SPTGEN

The following are example Internal SPTGEN screens associated with the Prestige’s command interpreter commands.

Table 145 Command Examples

/ci command (for annex a): wan adsl opencmd

EN PVA INPUT ADSL OPMD <0(glite)11(t1.413 |= 3 )12(gdmt) |3(multim ode)>

/ci command (for annex B): wan adsl opencmd

When the firewall is on, your Prestige acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the Prestige to protect your LAN against attacks.

ES The “Triangle Route” Problem

À traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. Some companies have more than one route to one or more ISPs. If the alternate gateway is on the LAN (and it’s IP address is in the same subnet), the “triangle route” problem may occur. The steps below describe the “triangle route” problem.

1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN.

2 The Prestige reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway B on the LAN to the WAN.

3 The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the Prestige.

As a result, the Prestige resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.

Appendix | Triangle Route 329

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

Figure 202 “Triangle Route” Problem

LAN WAN A à Internet C) + = [F4 D,

The “Triangle Route” Solutions

This section presents you two solutions to the “triangle route” problem.

IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface. Your Prestige supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the Prestige being the gateway for each logical network. By putting your LAN and Gateway B in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the Prestige to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario.

1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN.

2 The Prestige reroutes the packet to Gateway B, which is in Subnet 2.

3 The reply from WAN goes through the Prestige to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1. Figure 203 IP Alias

LAN 192.168.1.1-192 168.1.24 WAN + RS | a

A Internet ) = B_ D 3 B,

330 Appendix | Triangle Route

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

access point 67 access point. See also AP.

active protocol 144 AH 144 and encapsulation 145 ESP 144

ActiveX 134 Advanced Encryption Standard 288 AH 144

and transport mode 145 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 273 AP 67 AP (access point) 281 AP. See also access point.

authentication algorithms 141, 146 and active protocol 141 Authentication Header. See AH.

Bandwidth management monitor 43, 184 Basic wireless security 53

C CA 286 Certificate Authority 286 Certifications

viewing 5 certifications

CTS (Clear to Send) 282 Customer Support 8

E EAP Authentication 286 Encapsulating Security Payload. See ESP.

G General wireless LAN screen 70

transport mode 145 tunnel mode 145 when IKE SA is disconnected 144, 146

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

IPSec SA. See also VPN. IPSec. See also VPN.

MAC address filter 68

Service Set IDentity. See SSID. Service Type 232

Triangle Route Solutions 330

Trigger Port Forwarding Process 121

U Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) 191 URL Keyword Blocking 134 User Authentication 289 user authentication 68 local (user) database 69 RADIUS server 69 weaknesses 69

VPN. See also IKE SA, IPSec SA.

P-334U/P-335U User's Guide

channel 67 encryption 69

MAC address filter 68 security 68

Wireless security 284 wireless security 68 WLAN Interference 281 Security parameters 291 WPA 287 WPA compatible 70 WPA2 287 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 288 WPA2-PSK 288 WPA-PSK 288 Written Permission 3

ZyXEL Communications Corporation 3

ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 7

ZyXEL Network Operating System 3